Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Aficio 240W PDF
Aficio 240W PDF
Subject to change
13 February 2004
Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Sideways, LEF
(Long Edge Feed)
!WARNING
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.
!CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
1
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
i
1.5 HDD INSTALLATION.............................................................................. 1-35
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 1-35
1.5.2 HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................. 1-36
1.6 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION ................................................... 1-39
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 1-39
1.6.2 INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................... 1-40
1.7 STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION ........................................................... 1-44
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 1-44
1.7.2 STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE........................... 1-44
1.8 TABLE INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 1-45
1.8.1 TABLE ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................... 1-45
1.8.2 TABLE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................... 1-46
Setting the Copier on the Table.......................................................... 1-46
Leveling the Copier and Attaching Leg Covers .................................. 1-46
Attaching the Guide Plate .................................................................. 1-46
Connecting the Copier and Table....................................................... 1-47
Attach the Mylars to the Copier .......................................................... 1-48
Attach the Mylars to the Back of the Table......................................... 1-49
Attaching the Stopper Bracket............................................................ 1-50
ii
3.2.5 SMDB, VDB ................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.6 SIB, CGB POWER PACK .............................................................. 3-18
3.3 AROUND THE DRUM ............................................................................ 3-19
3.3.1 CHARGE CORONA WIRE, GRID WIRE, WIRE CLEANER .......... 3-19
3.3.2 QUENCHING LAMPS.................................................................... 3-21
3.3.3 LPH (LED PRINT HEAD)............................................................... 3-22
3.3.4 TRANSFER CORONA, SEPARATION CORONA WIRES ............ 3-24
3.4 DEVELOPMENT..................................................................................... 3-26
3.4.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................. 3-26
3.4.2 DEVELOPER ................................................................................. 3-27
3.4.3 PAPER SET SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR...................... 3-30
3.4.4 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH............................................................ 3-31
3.4.5 DEVELOPMENT FILTER............................................................... 3-32
3.4.6 USED TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE, TONER OVERFLOW
SENSOR........................................................................................ 3-33
3.5 DRUM ..................................................................................................... 3-34
3.5.1 DRUM UNIT................................................................................... 3-34
3.5.2 ECLEANING BLADE ..................................................................... 3-36
3.5.3 ID SENSOR, PICK-OFF PAWLS, PICK-OFF PAWL SOLENOID.. 3-37
3.6 PAPER FEED ......................................................................................... 3-38
3.6.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH, REGISTRATION ROLLER ................ 3-38
3.6.2 ROLL 1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH, FEED ROLLER......................... 3-41
3.6.3 ROLL 2 PAPER CLUTCH, FEED ROLLER ................................... 3-42
3.6.4 RF EXIT SENSOR ......................................................................... 3-43
3.6.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR..................................................................... 3-44
3.6.6 CUTTER: MOTOR, HP SENSORS................................................ 3-45
3.6.7 ROLL PAPER END SENSORS ..................................................... 3-47
3.6.8 CASSETTE FEED ROLLER .......................................................... 3-48
3.6.9 CASSETTE RELAY SENSOR, CASSETTE END SENSOR.......... 3-49
3.6.10 CASSETTE FEED MOTOR, CASSETTE OPEN SENSOR ......... 3-50
3.6.11 CASSETTE FEED CLUTCH ........................................................ 3-51
3.7 FUSING SECTION ................................................................................. 3-52
3.7.1 PRESSURE SPRING ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 3-52
3.7.2 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS........................................................... 3-53
3.7.3 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPERS............................................... 3-53
3.7.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR, FUSING EXIT SENSOR... 3-54
3.7.5 FUSING UNIT ................................................................................ 3-55
3.7.6 FUSING CLEANING ROLLER....................................................... 3-56
3.7.7 FUSING LAMP............................................................................... 3-57
3.7.8 HOT ROLLER ................................................................................ 3-58
3.7.9 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................... 3-59
3.7.10 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR, THERMOSTATS ........................ 3-60
3.8 MOTORS ................................................................................................ 3-61
3.8.1 SCANNER MOTOR ....................................................................... 3-61
3.8.2 DRUM MOTOR.............................................................................. 3-62
3.8.3 FUSING MOTOR, MAIN MOTOR.................................................. 3-63
3.8.4 USED TONER BOTTLE MOTOR .................................................. 3-66
iii
3.9 BOARDS................................................................................................. 3-67
3.9.1 MCU/IPU........................................................................................ 3-67
3.9.2 PSU ............................................................................................... 3-69
3.9.3 NVRAM.......................................................................................... 3-70
NVRAM Upload.................................................................................. 3-70
NVRAM Removal ............................................................................... 3-71
NVRAM Download ............................................................................. 3-71
3.9.4 T&S POWER PACK....................................................................... 3-72
3.9.5 RFDB (ROLL FEEDER DRIVE BOARD) ....................................... 3-73
3.9.6 SFDB (SHEET FEED DRIVE BOARD).......................................... 3-74
3.10 OTHER ................................................................................................. 3-75
3.10.1 HDD REPLACEMENT ................................................................. 3-75
3.10.2 COOLING FAN, OZONE FILTER ................................................ 3-77
3.11 SP ADJUSTMENTS.............................................................................. 3-78
3.11.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ................................................................ 3-78
Step 1: Check the Registration Line Speed ....................................... 3-78
Step 2: Magnification for Paper Type: Plain ....................................... 3-78
Step 3: Scanning Magnification.......................................................... 3-79
Step 4: Magnification for Paper Type: Translucent ............................ 3-79
Step 5: Magnification for Paper Type: Film ........................................ 3-79
Step 6: Scanner Mask Setting............................................................ 3-80
Step 7: Erase Margins........................................................................ 3-80
Step 8: Printer: Leading Edge, Side-to-Side Registration .................. 3-80
Step 9: Scanner Mask Setting............................................................ 3-81
Step 10: Erase Margins...................................................................... 3-81
Step 11: Scanner Registration ........................................................... 3-81
Step 12: Printer: Cut Length............................................................... 3-82
Step 13: Synchro Cut (Trailing Edge Registration)............................. 3-83
3.11.2 CIS............................................................................................... 3-84
To Print the CIS Adjustment Pattern .................................................. 3-84
To Adjust the Image at the CIS Joints................................................ 3-85
3.11.3 LPH.............................................................................................. 3-87
Doing SP Adjustment Settings for a Replacement LPH ..................... 3-87
To Print Pattern IPU Test Pattern 51.................................................. 3-87
Main Scan Adjustment: White, Black Vertical Lines ........................... 3-88
Main Scan Adjustment: LED Light Level at LPH Joints...................... 3-89
To Adjust the LPH for Misalignment................................................... 3-90
3.11.4 LPH DENSITY ............................................................................. 3-91
To Print the R-10 Pattern 51 .............................................................. 3-91
To Correct Pattern Density................................................................. 3-91
4. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 SUMMARY....................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS...................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 SC1XXX........................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 SC2XXX........................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.3 SC3XXX........................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.4 SC4XXX........................................................................................... 4-5
iv
4.2.5 SC5XXX........................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.6 SC6XXX......................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.7 SC7XXX......................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.8 SC8XXX......................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.9 SC9XXX......................................................................................... 4-13
4.3 JAM CODE TABLES............................................................................... 4-15
4.3.1 COPIER JAM TABLES .................................................................. 4-15
4.3.2 SCANNER JAM TABLES .............................................................. 4-17
Scanner Ready Check Jams.............................................................. 4-17
4.4 COVER OPEN........................................................................................ 4-19
4.5 BLOWN FUSE TABLE............................................................................ 4-19
4.6 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART ........................................ 4-20
4.6.1 DATA FLOW IN 1-TO-1 COPY MODE .......................................... 4-20
4.6.2 DATA FLOW IN REPEAT COPY MODE ....................................... 4-20
4.6.3 DATA FLOW IN SCANNING MODE.............................................. 4-21
4.6.4 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (STANDARD SIZES) ............. 4-21
4.6.5 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (LONG) .................................. 4-22
4.6.6 DATA FLOW IN TEST PATTERN PRINTING................................ 4-22
4.6.7 IMAGE PROBLEM TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 4-23
4.6.8 FLOW CHART ............................................................................... 4-23
4.6.9 SCANNING .................................................................................... 4-24
4.6.10 PRINTING.................................................................................... 4-26
4.6.11 BOARD LEDS.............................................................................. 4-27
IPU LEDs ........................................................................................... 4-28
MCU LEDs ......................................................................................... 4-29
VDB LEDs.......................................................................................... 4-29
SIB LEDs ........................................................................................... 4-29
PSU LEDs.......................................................................................... 4-30
v
SP4-XXX Scanner.............................................................................. 5-39
SP5-XXX Mode .................................................................................. 5-49
SP7-XXX Data Log ............................................................................ 5-57
SP8xxx Data Log 2 ............................................................................ 5-71
vi
6.6.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-35
6.6.2 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MECHANISM ......................................... 6-36
6.6.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .................................................... 6-37
6.6.4 DEVELOPER CROSS-MIXING ..................................................... 6-38
6.6.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS................................................................... 6-39
6.6.6 ID SENSOR ................................................................................... 6-40
6.6.7 ID SENSOR OPERATION DURING MACHINE WARM-UP .......... 6-41
6.6.8 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ....................................................... 6-43
Overview ............................................................................................ 6-43
Supply Modes .................................................................................... 6-43
Detect Supply Mode........................................................................... 6-44
Fixed Supply Mode ............................................................................ 6-45
Toner Supply Clutch Operation .......................................................... 6-45
6.6.9 TONER END/NEAR-END DETECTION......................................... 6-47
Toner Near End.................................................................................. 6-47
Toner End .......................................................................................... 6-47
Toner End Recovery .......................................................................... 6-47
Toner End Recovery Flow Chart ........................................................ 6-48
6.7 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION..................................................... 6-49
6.7.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-49
Layout Diagrams ................................................................................ 6-49
Feed Station Overview....................................................................... 6-51
Manual Feed Table ............................................................................ 6-51
Roll Feeder......................................................................................... 6-51
Paper Cassette .................................................................................. 6-51
Paper Width and Media Type Settings............................................... 6-51
6.7.2 MANUAL FEED MECHANISM....................................................... 6-52
6.7.3 ROLL FEED MECHANISM ............................................................ 6-53
Drive................................................................................................... 6-53
Roll Pre-feeding ................................................................................. 6-54
Procedure........................................................................................... 6-55
6.7.4 ROLL FEEDER PAPER HOLDERS............................................... 6-56
6.7.5 ROLL PAPER CUTTING MECHANISM......................................... 6-57
6.7.6 ROLL END DETECTION ............................................................... 6-58
6.7.7 PAPER CASSETTE MECHANISM ................................................ 6-59
6.7.8 PAPER CASSETTE FEED ............................................................ 6-60
Cassette Paper Path .......................................................................... 6-60
Paper Cassette Pre-Feeding.............................................................. 6-61
6.7.9 PAPER CASSETTE PAPER END DETECTION............................ 6-62
6.7.10 CONDENSATION PREVENTION................................................ 6-63
6.7.11 REGISTRATION .......................................................................... 6-64
6.7.12 PAPER FEED TIMING CHART ................................................... 6-65
6.8 IMAGE TRANSFER AND SEPARATION ............................................... 6-66
6.8.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-66
Transfer Corona Unit.......................................................................... 6-66
Separation Corona Unit...................................................................... 6-66
6.8.2 PICK-OFF PAWL OPERATION ..................................................... 6-67
vii
6.9 FUSING UNIT......................................................................................... 6-68
6.9.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-68
6.9.2 PAPER FEED THROUGH THE FUSING UNIT ............................. 6-69
6.9.3 FUSING PRESSURE CONTROL MECHANISM ........................... 6-70
6.9.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................... 6-71
Zero-Cross Control Test..................................................................... 6-71
Switching on the Fusing Lamp Power ................................................ 6-71
Fusing Warm-up Time........................................................................ 6-71
Fusing Temperature Control .............................................................. 6-72
6.9.5 HOT ROLLER CLEANING............................................................. 6-76
6.9.6 HOT ROLLER THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS ................ 6-77
6.9.7 FUSING UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM ............................................. 6-78
6.9.8 WRINKLE PREVENTION .............................................................. 6-79
Motor Speed Control .......................................................................... 6-79
Inching Control ................................................................................... 6-79
6.10 PAPER EXIT......................................................................................... 6-80
6.10.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 6-80
Upper Exit .......................................................................................... 6-80
Rear Exit ............................................................................................ 6-80
Jam Detection .................................................................................... 6-80
6.10.2 SWITCHING THE PAPER EXIT .................................................. 6-81
Upper Exit .......................................................................................... 6-81
Rear Exit ............................................................................................ 6-81
6.10.3 PAPER EXIT DRIVE.................................................................... 6-82
6.11 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................. 6-83
6.11.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 6-83
6.11.2 DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .................. 6-84
6.11.3 MCU, IPU..................................................................................... 6-89
MCU (Main Control Unit) .................................................................... 6-89
IPU (Image Processing Unit).............................................................. 6-89
6.11.4 PSU ............................................................................................. 6-90
6.11.5 SMDB, VDB, SIB ......................................................................... 6-91
SMDB (Scanner Motor Drive Board) .................................................. 6-91
VDB (Video Drive Board) ................................................................... 6-91
SIB (Scanner Interface Board) ........................................................... 6-91
6.11.6 RFDB, SFDB................................................................................ 6-92
RFDB (Roll Feed Drive Board)........................................................... 6-92
SFDB (Sheet Feed Drive Board)........................................................ 6-92
SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... SPEC-1
1. COPIER ENGINE ................................................................................SPEC-1
2. ROLL FEEDER B641/B642 .................................................................SPEC-4
3. PAPER CASSETTE B643 ...................................................................SPEC-4
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION .............................................................SPEC-5
viii
13 February 2004 PREPARATION
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
1.1 PREPARATION
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1-1
PREPARATION 13 February 2004
Back 600 mm
Front 1000 mm
B125I520.WMF
1-2
13 February 2004 PREPARATION
Installation
The machine must be installed in a building that has protection against electrical
malfunctions by a circuit breaker, or an equivalent device. Such devices are
necessary to give the machine protection for over-current and short circuits
1-3
PREPARATION 13 February 2004
1-4
13 February 2004 PREPARATION
Installation
This is a summary of the important SP settings that are necessary for this
installation.
Quick Reference for Installation SP and User Tool Settings
This is a summary of the SP and User Tool settings necessary for installation. For
more details, see 1.2.3.
Main Machine Installation
SP 2923 002 Cleaning Blade Set Mode Applies a thin layer of toner to the drum. This
prevents scratches on the drum when the machine
power comes on for the first time.
SP 3001 005 ID Sensor Setting – Developer Initializes the ID sensor for auto process control.
Initialization
SP 1960 Optional Paper Setting Enables installed options: Roll feeder (1 or 2 rolls),
paper cassette. This setting is not necessary if no
paper feed options are installed. (The default setting
is for the manual feed table.)
User Tool General Features> Tray Paper Sets the paper sizes for the roll(s) installed in the roll
Size feeder and the optional paper cassette. Do this
setting for the manual feed table (Bypass Tray),
even if no paper feed options are installed.
User Tool General Features> Tray Paper Sets the paper types for the roll(s) installed in the
Type roll feeder and the optional paper cassette. Do this
setting for the manual feed table (Bypass Tray),
even if no paper feed options are installed.
User Tool Date and Time Check the date and time setting. If they are not
correct, set the correct date and time.
User Tool Original Paper Size For NA only. Select either “Engineering” or
“Architecture” (whichever is used most frequently)
for automatic original width detection.
Roll Feeder Installation
SP1920 Cut Length Adjustment Sets the cut length settings for the rolls installed in
the roll feeder. These settings are different for each
machine. The settings are on a label attached to the
right side of the roll feeder drawer.
SP1001 001 Leading Edge Registration – Roll Adjust if necessary for B641/B642.
Feed
SP1002 001 Side-to-Side Registration – Roll 1 Adjust if necessary for Roll Feeder B641/B642.
SP1002 002 Side-to-Side Registration – Roll 2 Adjust if necessary for Roll Feeder B642 only.
Paper Cassette
SP1001 003 Leading Edge Registration – Cut Adjust if necessary for Paper Cassette B643.
Paper Tray
SP1002 003 Side-to-Side Registration – Cut
Paper Tray
HDD Installation
SP4960 015 HDD Connection On/Off Enables the HDD after it is installed. The machine
will not detect the HDD until this SP is done. This SP
must be done before the HDD can be formatted.
SP4960 003 Formatting The HDD must be formatted. Formatting requires
about 25 min.
Stamp Board Installation
SP5137 Stamp Function On/Off Enables the stamp board after it is installed. The
machine will not detect the stamp board until this SP
is done.
1-5
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
Description Q’ty
1. Original Output Guides ....................................................... 6
2. Upper Output Stacker ......................................................... 2
3. Upper Output Guide............................................................ 1
4. Copy Exit Selection Lever ................................................... 1
5. NECR.................................................................................. 1
6. Cloth – Exposure Glass ...................................................... 1
7. Operating Instruction Holder ............................................... 1
8. Studs................................................................................... 2
9. Operation Panel Anchor Screws ......................................... 3
10. Flat Brush (Fusing Unit Guide Spurs) ............................... 1
1 2 3 4
5
B125I012.WMF
10 9 8 7 6
1-6
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
Installation
Removing the Shipping Material
B125I013.WMF
!CAUTION
Do not connect the power cord to the power source during these
installation procedures until the procedure tells you to do this.
1. Remove all the orange tape and packing materials from the copier.
1-7
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B125I006.WMF
You can adjust the position of the operation panel to decrease bright reflections
from lighting.
1. Lift or lower the operation panel [A] to one set of the three sets of holes to set
the panel at the necessary height.
2. Push each anchor screw [B] into its hole (! x 3).
NOTE: It is not necessary to tighten the screws.
If it is necessary to remove the anchor screws [B] and adjust the height:
1) Loosen each screw until the anchor is loose.
2) Pull the screws from their holes.
3) Push each screw into its new hole.
1-8
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
Installation
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[G] [E]
Roll Feeder
B641I007.WMF [B]
Table [F]
B662I002.WMF
1. Do not remove the shipping tape from the connectors [A] of the roll feeder [B].
This prevents damage to the connectors when the copier is put on top of the
roll feeder.
!CAUTION
The copy machine weighs 105 kg (231 lb.). Two or more customer
engineers are necessary to lift the copier and set it on the roll feeder or
table. There are two handles in recesses on each side of the copier. To
prevent injury or damage to the machine, always use these handles to
lift the copier.
2. Lift the machine, and set its rubber feet [D] into the holes [E] on the top of the
roll feeder [B] or table [F].
NOTE: With one person at each end of the machine, use the two handles [C]
on each end of the machine to lift it.
3. Make sure that you put the rubber feet of the copier into the holes on top of the
roll feeder or table.
4. Check the dehumidifier switch. Make sure that it is OFF. If it is ON, set it to
OFF.
1-9
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C] B125I011.WMF
B125I015.WMF
[F]
1-10
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
[C]
[B]
B125I016.WMF
8. Push up the buttons [A] on the left and right sides of the upper unit to release
and open it.
9. Install the studs [B] on the right side and the left side.
NOTE: You must fasten each stud in the upper hole [C] on both sides.
10. Close the upper unit.
1-11
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[A]
B125I017.WMF
[B] [C]
[E]
[D]
B125I008.WMF
[E]
1-12
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
[A]
Installation
[B]
[D]
B125I003.WMF
[C]
[E]
[C]
B125I010.WMF
1-13
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
Developer
[D]
[A] [A]
[C]
[B]
[E] B125I002.WMF
1. Push up the buttons [A] to release the upper unit. Then lift the upper unit [B].
2. Open the toner hopper cover [C].
3. Remove all tape and packing materials [D] in the upper unit.
4. Pull out the drum protection sheet [E].
1-14
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
[A]
Installation
[B]
[C]
B125I005.WMF
5. Add one 1 kg pack of developer to the development unit. Do not add the
second pack at this time.
• Open the first pack of developer [A].
• Slowly add the developer from the first pack into the development unit. Move
the pack from left to right until the pack is empty.
• All parts of the opening in the development unit must receive equal
quantities of developer.
6. Close the toner hopper cover [B].
7. Close the upper unit [C].
8. Connect the power supply cord. Switch the main power switch on. The main
motor switches on and distributes the developer evenly inside the development
unit.
9. Switch the main power switch off and disconnect the power cord.
10. Open the upper unit.
11. Open the toner hopper cover.
12. Open the second 1 kg pack of developer, then slowly add it to the development
unit. Move the pack from left to right until it is empty.
13. Use a clean cloth to clean the edges around the slot of the development unit.
1-15
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[D]
[A]
[B]
B125I018.WMF
1. Carefully shake the toner cartridge [A] about 10 times. This makes sure that
there are no clumps of toner in the cartridge.
2. Set the toner cartridge in the machine.
3. Pull up the tape [B] then pull it across the toner cartridge from right to left to
remove the tape.
4. On the right end of the toner cartridge, turn the knob [C] clockwise until it stops.
5. Close the toner hopper cover [D].
6. Close the upper unit. Make sure that the upper unit locks on the left and right
sides.
7. Switch the main power switch on.
8. Input the lot number of the developer. The lot number is embossed on the edge
of the developer pack.
• Go into the SP mode and use SP5998.
• Push a number key (0-9) to input a number.
• To input a hyphen press " once, then push ".
• To input a letter, push " again and again until the necessary letter (A-Z) is
shown, then push ".
• If the entry immediately after a letter is a number, push the number key. (You
do not need to push ".)
9. Do SP2923 002 (Cleaning Blade Set Mode). This applies a thin layer of toner to
the bare drum.
• Push #, then $%&, then push ' and hold it for 3 seconds.
• Push $.
• Push ()(*%%( then push ".
1-16
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
[A]
Installation
B125I004.WMF
1-17
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
1. Push #.
2. Push $%&.
3. Push and hold ' for 3 seconds.
4. Input the group number (“1” for “Copier”). Then input the full SP number to go
directly to the SP code screen.
5. To input an SP number:
• Do not put a hyphen (-) between the first 4 digits and the last 3 digits.
• If the 2nd half of the SP code is only 1 or 2 digits, input the zeros that are in
front. For example, if the 2nd number is 1 or 12, push %%$ or %$(.
• If you input only the first 4 digits of an SP that has some sub levels, the first
SP code (001) will be shown. Push the key below “PrevMenu” or
“NextMenu” to show the SP. Then push the key below “Set” or push ".
6. Set the adjustment value.
• If a minus sign (-) is necessary, push " to change the +/- sign.
• If a decimal point is necessary, do not push the decimal point button. For
example, to input “-1.3”, push " for the minus sign, then push $*.
• If you make an error, push ' to reset the setting, then try again. You cannot
correct it with a new entry.
7. Push the key below “Set” on the LCD, or push " to enable the setting that
you made.
To go out of SP mode
1. Push the key on the operation panel below “Exit” one time or more, until you
are back at the initial copy screen.
2. Switch the main power switch off, then switch it on again.
NOTE: You must do this to enable the SP values that you input.
1-18
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
Installation
You must enable the paper supply options with this SP setting each time you add
an option.
NOTE: This setting is not necessary if the machine is installed without the roller
feeder and paper cassette options.
Do SP1960 to enable the options that you installed.
0: Manual feed table only (no options)
1: Roll Feeder with Roll 1 only
2: Roll Feeder with Roll 1, Roll 2
3: Roll Feeder with Roll 1, Paper Cassette
4: Roll Feeder with Roll 1, Roll 2, Paper Cassette.
• If two paper rolls are installed, Roll 1 is the front paper roll and Roll 2 is the
rear paper roll.
• For example, to set the machine for Roll 1, Roll 2, and the paper cassette,
push , then push “Set”.
1-19
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
1. Push the “User Tools” key - then select $ “System Settings”> $ “General
Features.
2. Push %, to select “04 Tray Paper Size”.
The “1 Bypass Tray” selection is shown with the selections for each installed
paper supply option. Selections are shown only for installed options.
If you installed all the options, you will also see “2 Paper Roll 1, 3 Paper Roll 2”,
and “4 Cut Paper Tray”.
If selections for the installed options are not shown:
• Do the procedure in the section immediately before this to enable the paper
feed options.
• Make sure that you switch the main power switch off then back on to enable
the paper feed options.
• If you did not switch the main power switch off then back on to enable the
selections done for SP1960, the selections for paper size will not be shown.
3. To set the paper size for the manual feed table and each option:
1) Push the applicable number on the 10-key pad.
2) Push the right or left arrow key to highlight the applicable size.
3) Push the key below “OK”. The display changes to the one that was shown
before.
4) Do this procedure again until the paper sizes for each paper supply option
are set.
4. Push the key below “Prev Menu”, then push the key below “Next”.
5. Push %+ to select “05 Tray Paper Type”
6. To set the paper type for the manual feed table (bypass tray) and each option:
1) Push the applicable number on the 10-key pad.
2) Push the right or left arrow key to highlight the applicable size.
3) Push the key below “OK”. The display changes to the one that was shown
before.
4) Do this procedure again until the paper types for each paper supply option
are set.
1. Push the “User Tools” key - then select $ “System Settings”> $ “General
Features.
2. Push %* to select “03 Orig. Paper Size”.
3. Select “Engineering” or “Architecture” (whichever is used most frequently by the
operator).
1-20
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
Installation
If you installed the optional hard disk drive, do this procedure.
1. Do SP4960 015 (HDD Connection On/Off) and set “1” (Enable) to enable the
hard disk unit.
2. Switch the main power switch off, then switch it back on.
3. Do SP4960 003 (Formatting) to format the hard disk.
• About 25 minutes are necessary to format the disk.
• The display shows the quantity of formatting that is completed, until the
display gets to 100%.
Important: Never switch the power off while the machine is formatting the hard
disk.
1-21
COPIER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[A] [D]
[C]
[B]
B125I007.WMF
[E]
B641I011.WMF
1-22
13 February 2004 COPIER INSTALLATION
Copy Check
Installation
Scan an original to confirm that the copier operates correctly.
1. Set an original or test pattern face down on the original feed tray.
2. After about 1 second, the machine holds the original, stops again for 1 second,
then feeds it.
3. Do a sample copy from the roller feeder and paper cassette if these options are
installed.
4. If the copied image is not in the correct position, do SP2941 (IPU Test Pattern)
and print pattern 11. For instructions on leading edge and side-to-side
adjustments, see the “SP Adjustments” section of “3 Replacement and
Adjustment”.
Roll Feeder Adjustments
SP No. Name Comment
SP1001 001 Leading Edge Registration – Roll Feed B641/B642
SP1002 001 Side-to-Side Registration – Paper Roll 1 B641/B642
SP1002 002 Side-to-Side Registration – Paper Roll 2 B642 only
• To prepare the machine for transport to a different building, disconnect the copier
and the roller feeder (or table). Attach the drawer to the frame with tape, or the
roll feeder drawer will fall out of the table frame.
• Lift the copier with one person on each end of the copier. Be sure to use the
handles in recesses on the sides of the copier. Do not tilt the machine more than
30o from the horizontal, or developer and toner will spill.)
1-23
ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
Description Q’ty
1. Lower Output Trays ............................................................ 3
2. Leg Covers.......................................................................... 2
3. Movable Guides .................................................................. 6
4. Shoes.................................................................................. 4
5. Joint Brackets (Left, Right).................................................. 2
6. Screws (Blue)...................................................................... 9
7. Screws (Cosmetic Silver) .................................................... 4
8. Harness Brackets ............................................................... 2
9. Mylars – Wide ..................................................................... 2
10. Mylars – Narrow................................................................ 2
11. Guide Plate ....................................................................... 1
12. Nylon clamps .................................................................... 1
13. Harness clamp .................................................................. 1
14. Ferrite Core....................................................................... 1
1 2 3 4 5
11
14 B641I013.WMF
10 9 8 6 7
13 12
1-24
13 February 2004 ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION
Installation
Setting the Copier on the Roll Feeder
Set the copier on the roll feeder. Follow the instructions in “Setting the Copier on
the Roll Feeder or Table” on page 1-9.
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B641I901.WMF
Important:
• The drawer of the roll feeder is locked and cannot be opened until the copier is
set on top of the roller feeder.
• Do not try to open the drawer of the roll feeder until after you set the copier on
top of the roll feeder.
1-25
ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B641I004.WMF
B641I006.WMF
[D] [C]
!CAUTION
Keep the power cord disconnected when you do these procedures.
1-26
13 February 2004 ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION
Installation
[C]
[B]
➀
B641I005.WMF
➁
[A] ➂
1. Attach the right joint bracket (the spindle [B] must go through the hole [A] in the
bracket). At the same time, align the plate with the holes for the three screws
(blue).
2. Attach screws ➀, ➁ but do not tighten them.
3. While you lift the copier by its handle [C], set screw ➂ in the lower hole of the
keyhole cutout and tighten it.
4. Tighten screws ➀ and ➁.
5. Do the above procedure again for the left joint bracket.
6. Reattach the manual feed table (! x 2).
7. Reattach the left and right covers (! x 3 each)
NOTE: Make sure that you attach the longer screws (thin thread) at the rear
sides of the covers.
8. Close the upper unit.
1-27
ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[F] [G]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B641I009.WMF
[C]
[B] B641I014.WMF
1-28
13 February 2004 ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION
Installation
[C] [B]
[A]
[F]
B641I010.WMF
[E]
[D]
B641I016.WMF
1-29
ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
0 to –1 mm
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B641I020.WMF
In this procedure, you will attach the narrow mylars (x2) to the rear cover of the
copier. To attach the wide mylars (x2) to the backplate of the roll feeder, see the
section after this one.
1. If the rear cover is attached to the copier, remove it (! x 2).
2. Find the 5th space [A] from the left end of the rear cover.
3. Use a clean cloth, moist with a small quantity of alcohol, to clean this area and
the bottom edge of the cover.
4. Remove the tape from each end of one of the narrow mylars.
5. Attach one end to the top edge of the cover [B].
NOTE: The top edge must be flat and parallel to the edge of the cover. The
right edge of the mylar must be parallel to ridge [C].
6. Attach the other end of the mylar to the bottom edge of the cover [D].
7. Do this procedure again to attach the other narrow mylar to the right side of the
cover.
8. Reattach the cover at the rear of the copier (! x 2).
1-30
13 February 2004 ROLL FEEDER INSTALLATION
Installation
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[A]
0 to -1 mm
[F]
0 to -1 mm
B641I021.WMF
In this procedure, you will attach the wide mylars [A] to the rear plate [B] of the
table.
1. On the left side of the rear plate, find the straight line [C] and “┐”,“┌” patterns
[D].
2. Use a clean cloth, moist with a small quantity of alcohol, to clean this area and
the bottom edge of the cover.
3. Remove the tape from each end of one of the wide mylars.
4. Align the end with the narrow tape with the top edge [E] of the rear plate. Make
sure that the right edge is parallel to the vertical lines on the plate, then push
down.
5. Turn the end with the wide tape against the plate, and align its corner [F] with
the inverted “L” pattern embossed on the plate, then push it against the rear
plate.
6. Make sure that the tape surfaces are pushed fully against the rear plate.
1-31
PAPER CASSETTE INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
Description Q’ty
1. Paper Cassette Unit............................................................ 1
2. Screws ................................................................................ 4
3. Harness Clamps ................................................................ 4
4. Paper Cassette (Universal Type) ........................................ 1
1
2 3
B643I003.WMF
1-32
13 February 2004 PAPER CASSETTE INSTALLATION
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
B643I001.WMF
!CAUTION
Keep the power cord disconnected when you do this procedure.
1-33
PAPER CASSETTE INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[A]
[C]
B643I002.WMF
[B]
[D] B643I004.WMF
1-34
13 February 2004 HDD INSTALLATION
Installation
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. HDD Unit............................................................................. 1
2. IPU Harness (1 Large, 1 Small Connector)......................... 1
3. PSU Harness (2 Small Connectors).................................... 1
4. Decal................................................................................... 1
5. Screw.................................................................................. 1
6. Nylon Clamp ....................................................................... 1
1
2
3
B663I001.WMF
6 5 4
1-35
HDD INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
B641I014.WMF
!CAUTION
Keep the power cord unplugged when doing the following procedure.
1-36
13 February 2004 HDD INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
B663I002.WMF
1-37
HDD INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
[C]
B663I003.WMF
8. Connect the larger connector [A] of the PSU harness to the rear side of the
HDD unit.
9. Open the harness clamps [B] between the HDD unit and the IPU on the left
side ($ x 10).
10. Put the PSU harness into each saddle. Then lock each clamp ($ x 10).
11. Connect the PSU harness [C] to the PSU board at CN161.
12. Reattach the rear cover to the copier (! x 2).
13. Use a clean cloth, moist with a small quantity of alcohol, to clean an area near
the lower edge of the rear cover.
14. Remove the decal (B663171020) from its paper, and attach it to the rear cover.
NOTE: The SP settings necessary for the HDD are in section 1.2.3. Do these
settings after you complete all other installation procedures.
1-38
13 February 2004 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION
Installation
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Interface Unit Cover ............................................................ 1
2. Interface Unit....................................................................... 1
3. Nylon Clamps (Large) ......................................................... 1
4. Harness Clamp ................................................................... 1
5. Screws M3 x 8 .................................................................... 4
M4 x 8 .................................................................... 1
6. Nylon Clamps (Small) ......................................................... 1
7. Connector Cable (Bayonet Type) x 1 .................................. 1
8. Interface Cable.................................................................... 1
2
1
8 B690I001.WMF
7
6 5 4
1-39
INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B690I002.WMF
[D]
[C]
B690I004.WMF
!CAUTION
Keep the power cord disconnected when you do this procedure.
1-40
13 February 2004 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION
Installation
[B]
[C]
[A]
B690I003.WMF
1-41
INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[E]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B690I005.WMF
[F] [G]
B690I009.WMF
1-42
13 February 2004 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
[B]
B690I006.WMF [D]
[F]
[C]
[E]
B690I007.WMF
17. Attach the hooks [A] on the top edge of the cover bracket to the top of the
interface unit.
18. Attach the cover [B] to the interface unit (! x 1).
19. Reattach the rear cover of the copier (! x 2).
20. At the rear of the copier, attach the interface cable [C] to the interface unit.
21. Attach the cable to the hooks [D] on the cover.
22. Clean then rear plate [E] of the roll feeder with alcohol.
23. Attach the harness clamp [F].
24. Clamp the cable to the roll feeder (! x 1).
25. Attach the other end of the interface cable to the printer controller (server PC).
NOTE: No SP settings are necessary for the interface unit.
1-43
STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B641I014.WMF
[C]
B690I008.WMF
!CAUTION
Keep the power cord disconnected when you do this procedure.
1-44
13 February 2004 TABLE INSTALLATION
Installation
1.8.1 TABLE ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Lower Output Trays ................................................................ 3
2. Leg Covers.............................................................................. 2
3. Shoes...................................................................................... 4
4. Joint Brackets (Left, Right)...................................................... 2
5. Screws (Blue) ......................................................................... 9
6. Mylars – Wide ......................................................................... 2
7. Mylars – Narrow...................................................................... 2
8. Guide Plate ............................................................................. 1
9. Nylon Clamp ........................................................................... 1
10. Harness Clamp ..................................................................... 1
11. Stopper Bracket – End Fence (for NA Version (-57) Only).... 2
1 2 3 4
11
B662I005.WMF 5
10 8 7 6
9
1-45
TABLE INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B662I004.WMF
!CAUTION
Keep the power cord disconnected when you do this procedure.
1-46
13 February 2004 TABLE INSTALLATION
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
B662I003.WMF
➂ ➁ ➀
[F]
[E]
[D]
B641I016.WMF
1. Put the spindle [A] through the hole [B] in the right joint bracket. Align the plate
with the holes for the three screws (blue).
2. Attach screws ➀, ➁ but do not tighten them.
3. While you lift the copier by its handle [C], set screw ➂ in the lower hole of the
keyhole cutout and tighten it.
4. Tighten screws ➀ and ➁.
5. Do the above procedure again for the left joint bracket.
6. Reattach the manual feed table (! x 2).
7. Reattach the left and right covers (! x 3 each)
NOTE: Make sure that you attach the longer screws (thin thread) at the rear
sides of the covers.
8. Close the upper unit.
9. Clear the rear plate [D] of the table with alcohol.
10. Attach the harness clamp [E].
11. Clamp the power cord [F] to the table (! x 1).
1-47
TABLE INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
0 to –1 mm [B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B641I020.WMF
In this procedure, you will attach the narrow mylars (x2) to the rear cover of the
copier. To attach the wide mylars (x2) to the backplate of the roll feeder, see the
section after this one.
1. If the rear cover is attached to the copier, remove it (! x 2).
2. Find the 5th space [A] from the left end of the rear cover.
3. Use a clean cloth, moist with a small quantity of alcohol, to clean this area and
the bottom edge of the cover.
4. Remove the tape from each end of one of the narrow mylars.
5. Attach one end to the top edge of the cover [B].
NOTE: The top edge must be flat and parallel to the edge of the cover. The
right edge of the mylar must be parallel to ridge [C].
6. Attach the other end of the mylar to the bottom edge of the cover [D].
7. Do this procedure again to attach the other narrow mylar to the right side of the
cover.
8. Reattach the cover to the back of the copier (! x 2).
1-48
13 February 2004 TABLE INSTALLATION
Installation
[C] [B]
[E]
[D]
[A] 0 to -1 mm
[F]
0 to -1 mm
B641I021.WMF
In this procedure, you will attach the wide mylars [A] to the rear plate [B] of the
table.
1. On the left side of the rear plate, find the straight line [C] and “┐”,“┌” patterns
[D].
2. Use a clean cloth, moist with a small quantity of alcohol, to clean this area and
the bottom edge of the cover.
3. Remove the tape from each end of one of the wide mylars.
4. Align the end with the narrow tape with the top edge [E] of the rear plate. Make
sure that the right edge is parallel to the vertical lines on the plate, then push
down.
5. Turn the end with the wide tape against the plate, and align its corner [F] with
the inverted “L” pattern embossed on the plate , then push it against the rear
plate.
6. Make sure that the tape surfaces are pushed fully against the rear plate.
1-49
TABLE INSTALLATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A] B641I015.WMF
NOTE: This stopper bracket is only for machines in North America that use inch
paper sizes.
1. Remove the stoppers [A] ($ x 2 each).
2. Use a clean cloth soaked in alcohol to clean the surfaces [B] where the stopper
brackets [C] will be attached.
3. Remove the double-sided tape [D] from the rear of each bracket.
4. Install each bracket and stopper on the arms.
5. Lock each stopper in the correct position (% x 2 each).
1-50
13 February 2004 PM TABLE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM TABLE
Key for the PM Table
Letter Action
Maintenance
A Adjust
Preventive
C Clean
I Inspect
L Lubricate
R Replace
2-1
PM TABLE 13 February 2004
PM Interval
Description Q’ty PM Comments
Metric Feet Prints
Around the Drum
Charge Corona Wire 1 11.0 36.0 18.6 C/R Replace if necessary.
Corona Wire Cleaner 1 5.5 18.0 9.3 R
Charge Corona Casing 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Damp cloth
Grid Wires 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Lens paper
Transfer Corona Wire 1 11.0 36.0 18.6 C/R Replace if necessary.
Separation Corona Wire 1 11.0 36.0 18.6 C/R
T&S Unit Casing and Lens paper or dry
5.5 18.0 9.3 C
Guides cloth.
Quenching Lamp 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Lens paper or dry cloth
ID Sensor 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Dry cloth
Pick-off Pawl 5.5 18.0 9.3 C
Lens paper or alcohol.
After cleaning, touch to
discharge static.
LPH (LED Print Heads) 5.5 18.0 9.3 C
Important: Use no
other chemical
cleaners!
Fusing Unit
Hot Roller 1 27.5 90.0 46.5 R Replace if necessary.
Fusing Cleaning Roller 1 27.5 90.0 46.5 R Always replace with
hot roller.
Hot Roller Bushings 1 27.5 90.0 R Always replace with
46.5
hot roller. Lubricate.
Pressure Roller 1 33.0 108.0 55.8 R Replace if necessary.
Hot Roller Strippers 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Dry cloth.
Pressure Roller Strippers 5.5 18.0 9.3 C
Hot Roller Thermistor 11.0 36.0 18.6 C
Pressure Roller Thermistor 11.0 36.0 18.6 C
Fusing Exit Guide Plate 5.5 18.0 9.3 C
Paper Junction Gate 5.5 18.0 9.3 C
Fusing Entrance Guide 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Cleaner brush
Spurs Alcohol, dry cloth at
every visit. (☛2.2)
Fusing Exit Rollers 11.0 36.0 18.6 C Alcohol, dry cloth
Fusing Exit Sensor 5.5 18.0 9.3 C Blower brush
Fusing Gears 5.5 18.0 9.3 L Barrierta – S552R
2-2
13 February 2004 PM TABLE
PM Interval
Description Q’ty PM Comments
Metric Feet Prints
Others
Ozone Filter 1 5.5 18.0 9.3 R
Line Speed & Magnification Adjust after replacing
Adjustments rollers. For details, see
Maintenance
A
Preventive
“SP Adjustments” in
Section 3.
2-3
CLEANING THE ENTRANCE SPURS 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B125P901.WMF
2-4
13 February 2004 LUBRICATION POINTS
Maintenance
Preventive
➃ (Sleeve)
[A]
➀ B125P902.WMF
2-5
LUBRICATION POINTS 13 February 2004
[A]
B125P903.WMF
[A]: Fusing Gears (Barrieta S552R). Apply to the surface of the rim.
2-6
13 February 2004 COMMON PROCEDURES
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[D]
B125R913.WMF
Always remove these items before you start work on the machine:
[A]: Upper output stackers (x 2)
[B]: Copy exit selection lever (x 1)
[C]: Original output guides (x 6)
[D]: Upper output guide (x 1)
Lower output trays (x 3) (not shown)
Reinstallation
• The copy-exit selection lever must be up. In this position, the user can set the
paper feed exit on the operation panel with the “Upper Copy Output” key. This
key is disabled with the lever down and the copies always feed out at the rear.
3-1
COMMON PROCEDURES 13 February 2004
[C] [A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B125R502.WMF
Reinstallation
• Make sure the original feed unit and upper unit are open.
• Always install the lower covers before the upper covers.
• If necessary, push in the upper unit release buttons [D] when you attach the
upper covers.
3-2
13 February 2004 COMMON PROCEDURES
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R914.WMF
3-3
COMMON PROCEDURES 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B125R609.WMF
3-4
13 February 2004 COMMON PROCEDURES
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B125R105.WMF
3-5
COMMON PROCEDURES 13 February 2004
[D]
[A]
[C]
B125R106.WMF [B]
3-6
13 February 2004 COMMON PROCEDURES
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[B]
B125R107.WMF
Important: Always lock the scanner with a screwdriver when it is in the “up
position”.
3-7
COMMON PROCEDURES 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
B125R301.WMF
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the bent edge of the mylar [B] is attached around the edge of the
plate.
3-8
13 February 2004 COMMON PROCEDURES
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[B]
B125R302.WMF
[D] [C]
3-9
COMMON PROCEDURES 13 February 2004
[C]
[B]
[A]
B125R101.WMF
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the mylar [C] is on the front edge of the exposure glass.
3-10
13 February 2004 COMMON PROCEDURES
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
B125R915.WMF
3-11
SCANNER 13 February 2004
3.2 SCANNER
3.2.1 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS, ORIGINAL SET SENSOR,
SCANNER SWITCH
[B]
[A] B125R102.WMF
3-12
13 February 2004 SCANNER
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R108.WMF
3-13
SCANNER 13 February 2004
Reinstallation
After you replace the original feed roller or the original exit roller, do the CIS sub
scan test and adjustment, as shown below.
A 100 mm
5 4 3 2 1
B125R911.WMF
3-14
13 February 2004 SCANNER
[C]
[A] [B]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R113.WMF
Important: The exposure glass is very long and thin. It is very easy to break.
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the mylar is on top of the beveled edge of the exposure plate
• Make sure that the black seal is below the rear edge of the exposure glass. The
rear edge of the exposure glass must be on its metal supports and not in front of
them.
Correct
Incorrect
B125R916.WMF
Seal visible
3-15
SCANNER 13 February 2004
3.2.4 CIS
[B]
[A]
Rear View
B125R110.WMF
B125R109.WMF
Reinstallation
After you replace the CIS, do the following procedure:
1. Read the values for SP4972 that are printed on the label attached to the CIS
replacement unit.
NOTE: The label is attached to replacement CIS units only.
2. Do SP4972 and input the 8 values.
3. Do SP2941 and print Pattern 11 to check the CIS.
4. Adjust if necessary. (☛3.11.2)
3-16
13 February 2004 SCANNER
5. Do SP4428 002 (Image Scan Adjustment – Start) to adjust the standard white
level.
1) Go into SP mode 4428 002 and push Enter (#).
2) Push “1”. The machine shows “In Progress”.
3) Put a stack of 5 sheets of A1 LEF paper on the original feed table. Use plain
white paper of a type used by the customer. The machine feeds the stack
part of the way into the scanner. After approximately 20 seconds, the
machine feeds stack through and out of the scanner. Then the display will
change to “Finished”.
4) Push “Exit” three times.
5) Switch the main power off, then back on.
Replacement
Adjustment
6. Do SP4428 001 (Image Scan Adjustment – Flag Display) to check that the
white level was adjusted.
[A]
[B]
B125R104A.WMF
3-17
SCANNER 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
B125R103.WMF
3-18
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[B] [E]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[C]
B125R307.WMF
Reinstallation
• Put the left end into the hole on the left first (viewed from the rear of the machine).
Then, put the right end into the hole on the right.
• Attach the right plate [D], then the left plate [C].
• Make sure the T-bar of the cleaning pad [E] is connected to the guide wire.
• After you replace the charge corona wire, do SP2803 (Corona Wire Cleaning) to
clean the new corona wire.
3-19
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
[A]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B125R308.WMF
3-20
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R115.WMF
[B]
B125R116.WMF
3-21
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B125R112.WMF
3-22
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
Reinstallation
1. Adjust the position of the LPH until it is level.
2. Set the plates [B] lightly against the studs on each side. Then tighten the
screws.
Important:
• Do not push the plates forward with force against the LPH studs.
• If the studs are pushed forward, this could cause the LPH to move out of position
and cause images to be too dark.
1. Do SP2943 and input the values that are printed on the label attached to the
Replacement
Adjustment
replacement unit. (☛3.11.3)
2. Do SP2965 and input the values that are printed on the label attached to the
replacement unit. (☛3.11.3)
3. Make a test print and adjust if necessary. (☛3.11.3)
3-23
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
[C]
B125R406.WMF
Reinstallation
• At each end of the unit, make sure that the tabs [B] are fully engaged with the
studs [C].
• When the tabs are engaged correctly, the caps on the end are fully level.
3-24
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[D]
[E]
B125R407.WMF
Reinstallation
• Each paper guide pair must be installed at its original position.
• For each pair, the high guide is set on the outer side and the low guide is set on
the inner side.
• If each guide is not installed at its original position, this will cause paper to
wrinkle.
3-25
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
3.4 DEVELOPMENT
3.4.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
B125R304.WMF
!CAUTION
The development unit is very heavy. Pull it out slowly.
Reinstallation
• Attach the large shoulder screws [B] on each side first, then attach the flat-head
screws [C].
3-26
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
3.4.2 DEVELOPER
[D]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B125R306.WMFF
B125R309.WMF
3-27
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
[A]
[C]
[B]
B125R917.WMFMF
8. Add one (1 kg) pack of developer. Do not add the second pack at this time.
• Open the first developer pack [A].
• Slowly add the first pack of developer to the development unit. Move the
pack from left to right until it is empty.
• Make sure that the developer is applied equally across the slot of the
development unit.
9. Close the toner hopper cover [B].
10. Close the upper unit [C].
11. Connect the power supply cord. Switch the main power switch on.
12. Do SP5804 015 (Output Check – Main Motor) to start the main motor. This
supplies developer to the development unit.
13. Push “1” to start the motor and let it operate for 30 seconds.
14. Push “0” to stop the motor.
15. Switch the main power switch off.
16. Open the upper unit.
3-28
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
of the developer pack.
• Go into the SP mode and use SP5998.
• Push a number key (0-9) to input a number.
• To input a hyphen press % once, then push ".
• To input a letter, push % again and again until the necessary letter (A-Z) is
shown, then push ".
If the entry immediately after a letter is a number, push the number key. (You
do not need to push ".)
24. Do SP3001 005 (ID Sensor Initialization) to prepare the new developer.
3-29
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
[B]
[C]
[A]
B125R303.WMF
3-30
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
B125R305.WMF
[B]
3-31
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
[C]
B125R306.WMF
3-32
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[C] B125R501.WMF
[E]
3-33
DRUM 13 February 2004
3.5 DRUM
3.5.1 DRUM UNIT
[A]
B125R901.WMF
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B125R401.WMF
[A]: Open the upper unit and set the cleaning blade release lever to the left.
Development unit (☛ 3.4)
[B]: Drive belt plate, drive belt (! x 2)
[C]: Drum gear, white Teflon bushing. Use the long end of a hexagonal wrench to
loosen the two lock screws. Then remove the gear wheel.
[D]: Left hub of drum shaft (! x 2)
[E]: Right hub of drum shaft (! x 2)
Reinstallation
• Be sure to tighten the hexagonal lock screws in the drum gear.
• Set the cleaning-blade release lever to the right.
3-34
13 February 2004 DRUM
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R402.WMF
[B]
B125R403.WMF
!CAUTION
The drum unit is very heavy. Pull it out slowly.
Reinstallation
After you replace the drum:
• Do SP2923 (Cleaning Blade Set Mode). This applies toner to the drum and blade
to decrease friction between the drum and the cleaning blade. If you do this,
scratches on the drum or a bent cleaning blade are less possible to occur.
• Do SP3001 006 (ID Sensor Settings – ID Sensor Initialization) to reset the ID
sensor.
3-35
DRUM 13 February 2004
[A]
B125R404.WMF
Reinstallation
After you replace the cleaning blade:
• Do SP2923 (Cleaning Blade Set Mode). This applies toner to the drum and blade
to decrease friction between the drum and the cleaning blade. If you do this,
scratches on the drum or a bent cleaning blade are less possible to occur.
3-36
13 February 2004 DRUM
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C] B125R405.WMF
[B]
Drum (☛ 3.5.1)
Cleaning blade (☛ 3.5.2)
[A]: ID sensor (" x 3, # x 1, ! x 1)
[B]: Pick-off pawls (x2) (pressure release).
[C]: Pick-off pawl solenoid (# x 2, ! x 1)
Reinstallation
• Do SP3001 006 (ID Sensor Settings - ID Sensor Initialization) to reset the sensor
if you replaced it.
• If the ID sensor is damaged and cannot be replaced immediately, set SP2208
003 (Toner Supply Setting – Toner Supply Mode) to “1”. Then the customer can
continue to use the machine until a new ID sensor is available. After you install a
new ID sensor, reset this SP to 0.
3-37
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[B] [A]
[C]
[D]
B125R507.WMF
3-38
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
[D]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
B125R506.WMF
Reinstallation
Make sure that the vertical brace [C] is locked in the cutouts in the ceramic clutch
[D].
3-39
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[C]
[A]
[B]
B125R508.WMF
3-40
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
[A]
[C]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R918.WMF
After you replace the roller or the clutch, adjust the cut length with SP1920 111 and
SP 1920 115. (☛3.11.1)
3-41
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
[C]
B125R919.WMF
After you replace the roller or the clutch, adjust the cut length with SP 1920 211
and SP 1920 215. (☛3.11.1)
3-42
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R920.WMF
3-43
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[B]
[C]
B125R921.WMF
3-44
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B125R922.WMF
3-45
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[D]
B125R923.WMF
3-46
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B125R924.WMF
3-47
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B125R925.WMF
3-48
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[F]
B125R926.WMF
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
B125R927.WMF
Open the roll feeder drawer and remove the paper cassette.
Roll feeder rear plate (! x 2 Blue)
[A]: RFDB shield plate (! x 2).
[B]: Paper cassette unit (" x 4, # x 2, ! x 4)
NOTE: Pull the unit to the rear, then remove it from the front.
[C]: Relay sensor plate (! x 1)
[D]: Relay sensor (# x 1, pinch release x 2)
[E]: Cassette end sensor plate (! x 1)
[F]: Cassette end sensor (# x 1, ! x 1, pinch release x 3)
3-49
PAPER FEED 13 February 2004
[A]
[C]
[B] B125R928.WMF
[D]
B125R929.WMF
Open the roll feeder drawer and remove the paper cassette unit.
[A]: Relay sensor plate, cassette end sensor plate (! x 1 each)
[B]: Cassette open sensor (# x 1, pinch release x 2)
[C]: Paper cassette feed assembly (! x 6)
[D]: Paper cassette motor (" x 2, # x 1, ! x 2)
3-50
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
B125R930.WMF
3-51
FUSING SECTION 13 February 2004
[A]
B125R632.WMF
NOTE: Wrinkling occurs more frequently for some types of paper and film than for
others. Adjust only when necessary.
3-52
13 February 2004 FUSING SECTION
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R610.WMF
[A]: Open the paper exit cover and paper exit unit together.
[B]: Hot roller strippers (pressure release, spring x 1 each)
[A]
B125R612.WMF
3-53
FUSING SECTION 13 February 2004
[A]
[B] B125R611.WMF
3-54
13 February 2004 FUSING SECTION
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[A] B125R613.WMF
!CAUTION
Switch the main power switch off. Then disconnect the machine from its
power source. Let the fusing unit become cool for 10 minutes or more
before you remove it.
!CAUTION
The fusing unit is heavy. Pull it out slowly.
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the upper unit is open when you install the fusing unit.
• Push down on the levers [C] while you set the fusing unit in the machine.
• Connect the color coded connectors correctly when you reconnect the fusing
unit:
Europe: Blue ! Blue, White ! White
North America: Red ! Red, White ! White
3-55
FUSING SECTION 13 February 2004
[B]
[C]
[A]
B125R614.WMF
3-56
13 February 2004 FUSING SECTION
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[E]
B125R615.WMF
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the ends of the fusing lamp are given support by the rubber
grommets of the right support [B] and left support [D].
3-57
FUSING SECTION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
[B]
B125R616.WMF
3-58
13 February 2004 FUSING SECTION
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B125R617.WMF
[C]
B125R618.WMF
3-59
FUSING SECTION 13 February 2004
[A]
[B] B125R620.WMF
[C]
Fusing unit (☛ 3.7.5)
[A]: Hot roller thermistor (x1) (! x 1)
[B]: Thermostat 2 – 199°C (! M3x6 x 2)
[C]: Thermostat 1 – 200°C (! M3x6 x 2)
Reinstallation
• The thermostats (199°C and 200°C) must be installed at [C] and [D]. “199” and
“200” are clearly shown on the edge of each thermostat.
3-60
13 February 2004 MOTORS
3.8 MOTORS
3.8.1 SCANNER MOTOR
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R114.WMF
3-61
MOTORS 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
B125R111.WMF
3-62
13 February 2004 MOTORS
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
B125R503.WMF
3-63
MOTORS 13 February 2004
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B125R504.WMF
Reinstallation
If it is not easy to connect the connector at the rear of the motor when you install
the motor mount plate:
• Remove the rear cover.
• At the left rear corner of the copier, open two or three harness clamps to release
the motor harnesses. This will decrease the tension in the harnesses.
3-64
13 February 2004 MOTORS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R505.WMF
Remove the gear cover plate and motor mount plate. (Please refer to the two
pages before this one.)
[A]: Main motor (# x 2, drive belts x 2, ! x 4)
Reinstallation
If it is not easy to connect the connector to the rear of the motor when you install
the motor mount plate:
• Remove the rear cover.
• At the left rear corner of the copier, open two or three harness clamps to release
the motor harnesses. This will decrease the tension in the harnesses.
3-65
MOTORS 13 February 2004
[B]
[A] B125R705.WMF
PSU (☛ 3.9.2)
Toner collection bottle (☛ 3.4.6)
T&S power pack (☛ 3.9.4)
[A]: Motor plate (" x 1, # x 1, ! x 2)
[B]: Motor (! x 2)
3-66
13 February 2004 BOARDS
3.9 BOARDS
3.9.1 MCU/IPU
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
B125R908.WMF
B125R701.WMF
[C]
Rear cover (☛3.1.3)
Paper exit unit (☛3.1.4)
[A]: Brace (! x 3)
[B]: Board shield plate (! x 7)
[C]: MCU/IPU board tray (! x 3, " x all, # x 15 (MCU), # x 5 (IPU))
[D]: Lift the harnesses to remove the MCU/IPU tray.
3-67
BOARDS 13 February 2004
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B125R702.WMF
3-68
13 February 2004 BOARDS
3.9.2 PSU
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
B125R703.WMF
3-69
BOARDS 13 February 2004
3.9.3 NVRAM
NVRAM Upload
[A]
B125R931.WMF
If the electronic counter does not operate correctly, replace the NVRAM.
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Remove the rear cover. (! x 2)
3. Remove the MCU/IPU shield plate. (☛3.9.1)
4. On the MCU, move the jumper [A] from TB4 1-2 to TB4 to 2-3.
5. Put the IC card in the SCU socket (rear slot).
6. Switch the main power switch on.
7. Go into the SP mode and do SP5824 (Upload NVRAM Data). When the upload
is completed, follow the instructions on the LCD to complete the procedure.
8. Put the MCU jumper back to TB4 1-2.
3-70
13 February 2004 BOARDS
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R702.WMF
NVRAM Removal
1. Switch the main power switch off. Disconnect the machine power cord.
2. Remove the MCU/IPU tray. (☛3.9.1)
3. Pull the NVRAM chip [A, B] from the MCU board and replace it with a new chip.
[A]: NVRAM (Counter)
[B]: NVRAM (Data)
4. Reinstall the MCU/IPU board.
NVRAM Download
NOTE: This SP must be done together with SP5811 (Machine Serial Number)
after you replace the NVRAM.
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Make sure that the IC card with the downloaded NVRAM data is in the SCU
socket.
3. Switch the main power switch on.
4. Go into SP mode and do SP5825 (Download NVRAM Data).
5. Push the key on the LCD to start the download.
6. When the download is completed, follow the instructions on the LCD to
complete the procedure.
7. Switch the main power switch off.
8. Remove the jumper from TB4 2-3 and move it back to TB4 1-2.
9. Switch the main power switch on.
10. Do SP 5811 (Machine Serial Number) to set the serial number.
3-71
BOARDS 13 February 2004
[A] [B]
B125R704.WMF
3-72
13 February 2004 BOARDS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B] B125R932.WMF
3-73
BOARDS 13 February 2004
[A]
B125R933.WMF
3-74
13 February 2004 OTHER
3.10 OTHER
3.10.1 HDD REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R934.WMF
[C]
B125R935.WMF
Rear cover (! x 2)
Interface cover plate (if installed) (! x 1)
Right vertical brace (! x 2)
3-75
OTHER 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
B663R101.WMF
Reinstallation
• If a new HDD is not available, do SP4960 015 (HDD – HDD Connection On/Off)
to disable the HDD connection. This lets the customer use the machine until a
replacement HDD can be installed.
• Do SP4960 003 (HDD – Formatting) to format the new HDD. Approximately 25
minutes are necessary for formatting.
3-76
13 February 2004 OTHER
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R310.WMF
[B]
[B]: Plates (press release)
[C]: Ozone filter
[C]
B125R311.WMF
[D]
B125R312.WMF
3-77
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
3.11 SP ADJUSTMENTS
3.11.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Do these adjustments if output is unsatisfactory. Before you start to measure and
adjust, let the test print output become cool for three minutes.
NOTE: Always do these adjustments in the sequence given in Steps 1~13 below.
3-78
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
Replacement
Adjustment
Step 4: Magnification for Paper Type: Translucent
1. Make a 1:1 copy of the A0 SEF Magnification Chart with translucent (tracing)
paper.
NOTE: You can use a different test chart, if it has lines 1000 mm long in the
sub-scan direction and 700 mm long in the main-scan direction.
2. Measure the length and width of the images on the original and the copy.
3. Do the same measurements for “Magnification for Paper Type: Plain”.
4. Do these SPs in the sequence shown in this table, if the measurements are not
in the standard range:
SP Standard Comments
SP4911 003 Less than ±0.5 Correct Copy Magnification for Paper Type –
Translucent Vertical
SP4911 004 Less than ±0.5 Correct Copy Magnification for Paper Type –
Translucent Horizontal
3-79
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
Paper Feed
±0.5 mm
Sub Scan 5±
±0.5 mm
Main Scan 5± B125R907.WMF
2. Measure the gaps for the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
3-80
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
Replacement
Adjustment
Do these SPs to replace the “0” settings done in Step 6.
3-81
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
2. Measure the cuts and check them against the standards of this table.
Cut Length (mm) Cut Tolerance (mm)
Less than 297 ±3
420 ~ 1189 ±5
~2000 ±6
=3000 ±11
~4000 ±14
3-82
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Push the Interrupt key and go back to the SP mode.
5. Do SP4961 003 to check the scan length.
6. If the display is different, adjust with SP4961 001.
7. Push the Interrupt key and do SP4961 002.
8. Push the Interrupt key and scan the 1000 mm sheet that you prepared in Step
1.
9. Push the interrupt key to go back to the SP mode.
10. Do SP4961 003 to check the scan length.
11. If the display is different, adjust with SP4961 002.
Cut Length (mm) Cut Tolerance (mm)
Less than 297 ±4.50
~594 ±5.00
~841 ±6.00
~1189 ±8.50
~2000 ±18.0
~3000 ±27.0
~3600 ±33.0
3-83
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
3.11.2 CIS
To Print the CIS Adjustment Pattern
1. Open the roll feeder drawer and cut off a sheet manually from a roll. (Turn the
manual feed knob to feed the paper then push the cutter from side to side to
cut.)
2. Close the roll feeder drawer.
3. Go into the SP (Copy) mode.
4. Push the Interrupt (') key to show the main screen.
5. Set the roll as the paper feed source.
6. On the operation panel, set one of the rolls as the paper feed station.
7. Put the blank sheet of paper on the original feed tray and feed it into the
original feed unit. The pattern prints.
8. Push the Interrupt (') key to go back to the SP mode.
9. Use SP 4973 003 and push ".
10. Push #, then push the key below “Set”.
11. Push the key below “Exit” three times to go out from the SP mode. The pattern
prints.
12. In copy mode, copy the pattern you made at Step 7.
CIS-2 CIS-4
CIS 1 CIS 3 CIS 5
B125R937.WMF
Abc
CIS-5 CIS-4 CIS-3 CIS-2 CIS-1
B125R938.WMF
3-84
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
[A] [B]
Joint CIS 1-2 Joint CIS 1-2
CIS2 2 Area CIS-1 Area CIS2 2 Area CIS-1 Area
Replacement
Adjustment
B125R905.WMF
• The lines at CIS 1-2 [A] are wider than usual. If the lines are wider (as shown
above) or less wide than the other lines, adjust the main scan offset at CIS 1-
2 (SP4972 001).
• The lines at CIS 1-2 [B] are not aligned. If the output from CIS 1 is lower (as
shown above) or higher, adjust the sub scan offset at CIS 1-2 (SP4972 005).
3-85
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
6. Do this procedure again from Step 1 until the image at CIS 1-2 is correct.
7. Do this procedure for the other joints (CIS 2-3, CIS 3-4, CIS 4-5)
The “Effect” column in this table tells you which area moves with the
adjustment, and which area does not move.
3-86
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
3.11.3 LPH
Doing SP Adjustment Settings for a Replacement LPH
1. Remove the replacement LPH from its box.
2. Read the label attached to the replacement LPH and note of the settings for
SP2965 and SP2943.
NOTE: This label is attached to the replacement LPH only.
3. Remove the old LPH and install the new LPH unit.
4. Do SP2965 001, 002 and enter the settings you read from the label attached to
the LPH replacement unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Do SP2943 001-006 and enter the settings you read from the label attached to
the replacement unit.
6. Print a test print in the IPU Test Pattern mode to make sure that the LPH joints
are aligned correctly. (See below.)
7. Print IPU Test Pattern 51 to confirm that the LPH is functioning normally.
3-87
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
B125R561.WMF
Normal Pattern
If you see white or black lines at LPH 1-2, go to the next step.
• White lines occur if too few LEDs come on at the joint.
• Black lines occur if too many LEDs come on at the joint.
3-88
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
500 500
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
Replacement
Adjustment
510 510
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
B125R912.WMF
“500” are the default settings for LPH 1-2 and LPH 2-3.
If you change the 2nd digit of the value for LPH 1-2 (500 to 510) with SP2965 001,
this moves the four LEDs by one position to the left.
If you change the 2nd digit of the value for LPH 2-3 (500 to 510) with SP2965 002,
this moves the four LEDs by one position to the right.
If you change the 3rd digit of LPH 1-2 or LPH 2-3 (510 to 512, for example), this
increases the quantity of light from LEDs 1, 2, 3, 4 in the illustration.
The quantity of light can be adjusted for each LED independently with SP2947
(Power Correction). But, this fine adjustment is usually not necessary in the field.
For more, see “4. Service Tables”.
3-89
SP ADJUSTMENTS 13 February 2004
[A] [B]
B125R986.WMF
Broken lines [A] or [B] in the IPU Test Pattern (SP2941 11) show incorrect sub
scan timing at one or both joints.
1. Go into the SP mode, and do SP2965 003 for LPH 1-2
• Adjust the position of LPH 2 (LPH 1 does not move).
• If LPH 2 is higher than LPH 1, set a larger value.
• If LPH 2 is lower than LPH 1, set a smaller value.
2. Print one more pattern with SP2941 11) and check the alignment at the joints.
3. Do this procedure again until the pattern at the joint is correct.
4. Do SP2965 004 for LPH 2-3
• Adjust the position of LPH 3 to LPH 2 (LPH 2 is the standard).
• If LPH 3 is higher than LPH 2, set a larger value.
• If LPH 3 is lower than LPH 2, set a smaller value.
5. Do this procedure again until the pattern at the joint is correct.
The hot roller and pressure roller have a
slight spindle shape. The circumference at
the ends of the rollers [A] is slightly larger [A] [B]
than the circumference at the centers [B].
This makes sure that there is always
sufficient pressure on the paper between the
roller ends. But, this difference in
B125R939.WMF
circumference also causes a small
difference in the speed of paper feed. The paper transport speed at the ends is
slightly faster than at the center. Also, because the centers of the rollers bend in
slightly, this increases the risk of slipping at the center with paper less wide than
420 mm.
For users who always use paper wider than 420 mm, do the sub scan adjustments
for the LPH joints with SP2965 003, 004.
For users who use paper that is less than 420 mm wide, do the sub scan
adjustments for the LPH joints with SP2965 006, 007 after you input the values of
SP 2965 003 and 004 from the decal.
3-90
13 February 2004 SP ADJUSTMENTS
Replacement
Adjustment
7. Put the blank sheet of paper on the original feed tray, and feed it into the
original feed unit. The pattern prints.
8. Push the Interrupt (') key to go back to the SP mode.
9. Push the key below “Exit” three times to go out from the SP mode.
10. Check the density of the patterns in LPH 1, LPH 2, and LPH 3.
If density is equal for all areas, no adjustment is necessary. If the density is not
equal, do the procedure below.
B125R906.WMF
3-91
13 February 2004 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions
shooting
Trouble-
panel. To reset these SCs, turn the operation power switch to “off” then to “on”.
D switch or main power switch off and on.
These SCs are shown again if the error
occurs again.
4-1
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4.2.2 SC2XXX
There are no Group 2 SC codes for this machine
4.2.3 SC3XXX
Group 3 SP codes are related to image making.
300 D Charge Corona Output Error
The charge-corona feedback • Replace the charge corona unit.
voltage was less than 1 V for • Replace the high voltage cable.
more than 200 ms. • Clean or replace the corona wire.
• Check the CGB power pack fuse,
connection.
• Replace the CGB power pack.
4-2
13 February 2004 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
shooting
Trouble-
• Bad sectors were made on the hard disk during the hard disk check
done with SP4960-1. There were too many bad sector errors for the
MSU (Memory Super-charger Unit) to control. Do SP4906 003 to
format the hard disk.
• Bad sectors were made on the hard disk when the hard disk was
formatted with SP4960-3. The hard disk must be replaced (too many
bad sectors).
4-3
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4-4
13 February 2004 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
4.2.4 SC4XXX
shooting
Trouble-
• Replace the MCU.
• Replace the development unit.
• Replace the CGB power pack.
4-5
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4.2.5 SC5XXX
Group 5 SC codes are related to:
• Paper feed
• Paper transport in the paper path
• Fusing
508 D Cutter Error
The left and right cutter HP • Check the connections of the HP
sensors stayed on or off more sensors on the left and right side.
than 2 seconds. • Replace the HP sensors.
Temporary Solution
To use the machine until it is repaired, the customer can use the manual
feed tray as the default paper-feed source:
User Tools> 1 System Settings> 1 General Features> 17 Feed Start
Method> Bypass
4-6
13 February 2004 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
shooting
Trouble-
541 A Fusing Thermistor Errors
541-1 Fusing Thermistor Error 1
• The measured temperature • Make sure that the thermistor is set
of the hot roller stayed correctly.
below 7oC (44.6oF) for 60 • Make sure that the thermistor cable is
seconds after the machine connected.
was switched on. • Replace the thermistor.
-or-
• During machine operation
the hot roller temperature
fell to and stayed at 7oC
(44.6oF) for 40 seconds.
541-2 Fusing Thermistor Error 2
The analog voltage input from • Replace the thermistor.
the hot roller temperature was
less than 2 V for three
measurements. The thermistor
has short-circuited.
4-7
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4-8
13 February 2004 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
shooting
Trouble-
power supply 3 times at 50 ms • Replace the PSU.
intervals. • Replace the MCU
547-2 Zero-Cross Signal Error 2
No zero-cross signal detected
for 3 sec.:
• At machine power on.
• After a door or cover is
closed.
547-3 Zero-Cross Signal Error 3
No zero-cross signal detected
with 10 tries and the interrupt
count was less than or equal to
45.
549-4 Zero-Cross Signal Error 4
No zero-cross signal detected
with 10 tries and the interrupt
count was less than or equal to
66.
4-9
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4-10
13 February 2004 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
4.2.6 SC6XXX
Group 6 SC codes are for communication errors.
shooting
Trouble-
The machine sent a report on • No action necessary.
its condition, but CSS detected
an error. There is a problem on
the telephone line between the
machine location and the CSS
center.
4-11
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4-12
13 February 2004 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
4.2.7 SC7XXX
There are no Group 7 SC codes for this machine.
4.2.8 SC8XXX
There are no Group 8 SC codes for this machine.
4.2.9 SC9XXX
shooting
Trouble-
980 D HDD Access Error
980-1 IDNF error (HDD1)
980-3 ABRT error (HDD1)
980-5 Sequence error (HDD1)
An incorrect parameter was sent from • Update the MCU firmware.
the ECU (Engine Control Unit) to the
HDC (Hard Disk Controller).
4-13
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 13 February 2004
4-14
13 February 2004 JAM CODE TABLES
shooting
Trouble-
NOTE: 1) You must open and close the upper unit to release a jam at the fusing
unit.
2) If the user opens and closes the paper exit cover during copying, this is
not recorded in the jam record.
3) An original or paper feed jam that occurs just after the main power
switch or operation switch comes on is not recorded in the jam record.
PJ
Meaning Location Comment
Code
A sheet of paper is in the manual feed
1 Roll End Sensor (EXP) B
table at power on.
A sheet of paper is at the registration
2 Registration Sensor B sensor in the manual paper feed path at
power on.
A sheet of paper is at the fusing exit
3 Fusing Exit Sensor A
sensor (after the fusing unit) at power on.
The key counter was disconnected during
40 Key Counter Jam B
a copy job.
Paper Removal: Manual The paper was pulled out of the manual
51 B
Feed feed tray during a copy job.
A sheet of paper was put in the manual
Manual Paper Feed with
53 B feed tray with the roll feeder set as the
RF Selected
paper source for the copy job.
The paper length is 650 mm longer than
55 Main Motor Overrun B the maximum permitted for the manual
feed tray or roll feeder.
Registration Sensor The leading edge fed 0.5 sec. before the
60 B
OFF time permitted for 30 mm of feed.
The leading edge fed 0.5 sec. after the
61 Registration Sensor ON B
time permitted for 30 mm of feed.
4-15
JAM CODE TABLES 13 February 2004
PJ
Meaning Location Comment
Code
Registration Sensor The trailing edge fed 0.5 sec. after the
62 B
OFF time permitted for 30 mm of feed.
The leading edge fed 0.83 sec. before the
70 Fusing Exit Sensor OFF A
time permitted for 50 mm of feed.
The leading edge fed 0.83 sec. after the
71 Fusing Exit Sensor ON A
time permitted for 50 mm of feed.
The trailing edge fed 1 sec. after the time
72 Fusing Exit Sensor OFF A
permitted for 60 mm of feed.
The leading edge fed 0.5 sec. before the
81 RF Exit Sensor ON C
time permitted for 30 mm of feed.
The leading edge fed 0.5 sec. after the
86 Relay Sensor ON D
time permitted for 30 mm of feed.
The trailing edge fed 0.5 sec. after the
87 Relay Sensor OFF D
time permitted for 30 mm of feed.
The trailing edge fed 0.5 mm after the
Cassette Jam Sensor time permitted for 30 mm of feed. (The
88 D
OFF sheet from the paper cassette did not
pre-feed.)
RF Drawer Open During After the roll paper RF exit sensor came
91 C
Copying ON, the roll feeder drawer was opened.
The paper cassette was pulled out of the
Cassette Pulled Out
92 C roll feeder while the paper cassette motor
During Copying
was operating.
The RF exit sensor of the roll feeder went
98 Roll Paper Too Short C OFF 0.83 sec. before the time allowed for
60 mm of feed.
The RF exit sensor of the roll feeder went
99 Roll Paper Too Long C OFF 0.83 sec. after the time allowed for
60 mm of feed.
4-16
13 February 2004 JAM CODE TABLES
shooting
Trouble-
The A3 (11", 12") original size sensor is
DJ06 A3 (11", 12") Sensor P
ON.
DJ07 Original Exit Sensor P The original exit sensor is ON.
DJ08 30"/36" Sensor P The 30"/36" sensor is ON.
The original scanner unit on top of the
DJ15 Original Scan Unit Open P
machine is open.
Upper Unit Exit Cover The upper unit is not closed, or the
DJ16 P
Open release is not locked.
The original was not straight when it was
put in. The size of the original used for
the job was not the same as data sent
DJ17 Original Skewed P
from the original size sensors when the
registration sensor detected the leading
edge.
The original registration sensor came on
DJ20 Registration Sensor 1 P
before the original started to feed.
The registration sensor did not detect the
leading edge after the motor operated for
the time necessary to feed 15 mm.
DJ21 Registration Sensor 2 P The original scan job did not start even
after a start command was received from
the IPU because the original set sensor
switched OFF.
The original set sensor detected the
trailing edge and went OFF. But the
registration sensor did not go OFF, even
DJ22 Registration Sensor 3 P
after the feed rollers turned for the time
necessary to feed the original 20 mm
longer than the paper length.
The original exit sensor was ON when the
DJ25 Original Exit Sensor 1 P
machine started to scan the leading edge.
4-17
JAM CODE TABLES 13 February 2004
4-18
13 February 2004 COVER OPEN
shooting
Trouble-
clutches (24 V dc line)
4-19
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART 13 February 2004
PC
OIPU (ASIC)
CIS VDB LPH
1 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
16.66 MHz
16.79 MHz
B125T530.WMF
1 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
16.66 MHz
16.79 MHz
B125T531.WMF
4-20
13 February 2004 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART
PC
shooting
HDD Erase, Line Width Correction)
Trouble-
(Option) γ Correction
Gradation Processing
MSU (Error Diffusion/Dither Matrix)
B125T532.WMF
PC
1 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
16.66 MHz
16.79 MHz
B125T533.WMF
4-21
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART 13 February 2004
PC
1 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
16.66 MHz
16.79 MHz
B125T534.WMF
PC
Data Flow
Scanner Controller Printer Controller IPU Test Pattern
VDB Test Pattern
1 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
16.66 MHz
16.79 MHz
B125T535.WMF
4-22
13 February 2004 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART
Image
Problem
NO
OK
VDB Defective
shooting
Trouble-
NG
IPU Defective or
IPU Test NG Harness defective
pattern output between the IPU
and the VDB.
OK
SIB defective or
SIB Test NG harness between
Pattern Output IPU and SIB
defective
OK
SIB defective
CIS defective
B125T540.WMF
4-23
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART 13 February 2004
4.6.9 SCANNING
1. No image (blank copy/print, or no image with only vertical black lines on
the output)
Possible causes:
1) Connection problem between CIS and IPU.
2) CIS defective
Possible causes:
1) Low CIS output
2) IPU board defective
Possible causes:
1) Dirty exposure glass
2) CIS defective
Possible causes:
1) Dirty exposure glass
2) Dirt or scratches on the white plate above the CIS
3) CIS defective
B125T545.WMF
4-24
13 February 2004 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART
B125T546.WMF
B125T547.WMF
shooting
Trouble-
8. Bands/lines every 8mm pitch in halftone areas
Possible causes:
LPH defective
B125T548.WMF
4-25
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART 13 February 2004
4.6.10 PRINTING
1. No Image (blank copy/print)
Possible causes:
1) VDB board defective
2) IPU board defective
3) LPH (LED head) defective
B125T549.WMF
2. Band with no image-width 1/3 of image
Possible causes:
1) Connection problem between VDB and LPH
2) LPH head defective
B125T550.WMF
65 m m 130 m m 65 m m 130 m m 65 m m
B125T551.WMF
4-26
13 February 2004 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART
LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
SIB VDB
LED 1
LED 1
LED 2
IPU
LED 14
PSU TB3
LED 15
LED 16 IPU
LED 6
LED 5
LED 4
LED 3
1 2 3
MCU TB4
shooting
Trouble-
Vaa +24V
LED 13
LED 12
LED 11
LED 10
LED 9
LED 8
LED 7
1 2 3
Vca2 -12V
LED 2
LED 1
Vca2 +12V
LED 4
LED 3
(Copier Back)
B125T552.WMF
This illustration shows the LEDs from the rear of the copier.
• To see the LEDs near the SCU and ECU slots, you must remove the rear cover
of the copier.
• To update the copier firmware, the memory card that holds the ECU and SCU
programs is connected to the ECU slot and the SCU slot.
• Jumper TB4 is moved from 1-2 to 2-3 to do the NVRAM upload and download
procedure with SP5823 and SP5824.
4-27
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART 13 February 2004
IPU LEDs
No. Color Meaning
LED 1 GREEN Not used.
LED 2 GREEN Flashes while the HDC (Hard Disk Controller) operates.
Flashes when an LSYNC signal (VORES) comes from the VDIP
LED 3 GREEN
(ASIC).
Flashes when an LGATE signal (ACC01) comes from the VDIP
LED 4 GREEN
(ASIC).
LED 5 GREEN Lights when an FGATE signal comes from the VDIP (ASIC).
Lights when an XBFGATE signal comes from the VDIP (ASIC).
LED 6 GREEN
(This is the FGATE signal output to the MCU.)
Lights when the input data signal (LSB) of the printer application
LED 7 GREEN
is “1”.
Lights when the even-numbered data to the scanner application
LED 8 ORANGE
(MSB) is “0”.
Lights when the odd-numbered data to the scanner application
LED 9 GREEN
(MSB) is “0”.
Lights when the even-numbered data (MSB) from the scanner
LED 10 GREEN
(SIB) is “0”.
LED 11 ORANGE Lights when the odd-numbered data to the printer (VDB) is “0”.
LED 12 ORANGE Lights when the even-numbered data to the printer (VDB) is “0”.
Lights when the odd-numbered data (MSB) from the scanner
LED 13 GREEN
(SIB) is “0”.
Flashes when the Ri-10-1 module on the IPU operates. (During
LED 14 GREEN image processing, this LED goes off and on, and starts to flash
again when image processing is completed.)
Flashes when the Ri-10-2 module on the IPU operates. (During
LED 15 GREEN image processing, this LED goes off and on, and starts to flash
again when image processing is completed.)
Flashes when the Ri-10-3 module on the IPU operates. (During
LED 16 GREEN image processing, this LED goes off and on, and starts to flash
again when image processing is completed.)
LED 17 GREEN Lights when an FGATE signal from the scanner (SIB) is input.
LED 18 GREEN Lights when an FGATE signal is output to the printer (VDB).
4-28
13 February 2004 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART
MCU LEDs
No. Color Meaning
Flashes quickly while data is downloaded from the IC flash memory
LED 1 GREEN
card. Lights and stays on during normal operation.
Lights and stays on while SCU data is downloaded from the IC flash
LED 2 GREEN memory card. After the download is finished, goes off and stays off
during normal operation.
Flashes quickly while data is downloaded from the IC flash memory
LED 3 ORANGE
card. Lights and stays on during normal operation.
Lights and stays on while ECU data is downloaded from the IC flash
LED 4 ORANGE memory card. After the download is finished, goes off and stays off
during normal operation.
shooting
Trouble-
TB4: IC Card Setting
Pin No. Definition Initial Comment
1-2 Pin SWP Enabled O This is the normal operation setting.
Lets you put an IC card in the SCU slot
so you can upload and download
2-3 Pin SWP Disabled X
NVRAM data with SP5824 and
SP5825.
VDB LEDs
No. Color Meaning
LED 1 GREEN Lights for LPH2 print data (1-bit) from the VDIP (ASIC).
Flashes at power on while a test signal confirms that the VDIP
LED 2 GREEN
control operation is normal.
Lights when the RFGATE signal is created by the VDIP (ASIC)
LED 3 GREEN
during image exposure.
LED 4 GREEN Lights while the VDIP (ASIC) calibrates the amount of LPH light.
SIB LEDs
No. Color Meaning
Lights at power on while a test signal confirms that CPLD control
LED 1 ORANGE
operation is normal.
4-29
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART 13 February 2004
PSU LEDs
No. Color Meaning
ON Normal
• The machine has entered the energy save
Vaa +24 V GREEN mode (Energy Star).
OFF
• PSU defective, or the +24 V system has
shorted or is defective.
ON Normal
• The machine has entered the energy save
Vca2 –12 V GREEN mode (Energy Star).
OFF
• PSU defective, or the –12 V system has
shorted or is defective.
ON Normal
• The machine has entered the energy save
Vca2 +12 V GREEN mode (Energy Star).
OFF
• PSU defective, or the +12 V system (HDD)
has shorted or is defective.
ON Normal
• The machine has entered the energy save
Vcc +5.1 V GREEN mode (Energy Star).
OFF
• PSU defective, or the +5.1 system (Vcc2)
has shorted or is defective.
ON Normal. Also remains on in auto off mode.
Vcc1 +5.1 V GREEN • PSU defective, or the +5.1 system (Vcc1)
OFF
has shorted or is defective.
4-30
13 February 2004 USING THE SP MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 USING THE SP MODE
5.1.1 DIRECT ENTRY
Normal Direct Entry
1. Go into the SP mode.
• Push !.
• Push "#$.
• Push and hold % for 3 seconds.
The initial SP mode screen is shown.
1 Copy
X.XX B125XXXXO/B125XXXXO Exit
B125S901.WMF
Service
[Service]
Tables
SP-xxxx-xxx
SP-Mode Class 1 No. Select
Class No. 1<Feed>
PrevMenu NextMenu Set Exit
B125S902.WMF
5-1
USING THE SP MODE 13 February 2004
5-2
13 February 2004 SOFTWARE UPGRADE
Service
Tables
MCU
SCU
ECU
LED1
LED2
LED4
LED3
B125S903.WMF
3. Put the IC card in the ECU slot. Side “A” must face out and be inverted.
4. Switch the main power switch on. Look at LED4 and LED3 on the right end of
the ECU slot.
• “Please wait” comes on the LCD of the operation panel.
• LED4 lights orange. If this LED does not light, stop the machine power, make
sure that the IC card is connected fully, then switch the main power switch on.
• LED3 flashes orange quickly.
5-3
SOFTWARE UPGRADE 13 February 2004
5. Wait for approximately 3 minutes. When LED4 goes off and LED3 starts to
flash orange slowly at two-flash intervals, the ECU upgrade is completed.
6. Switch the main power switch off.
7. Remove the IC card from the ECU slot.
8. With its A side to the front, put the IC card in the SCU slot [C].
9. Switch the main power switch on. Look at LED2 and LED1 on the left end [D] of
the SCU slot.
10. Wait for approximately 4 minutes.
• LED2 lights green.
• LED1 flashes green quickly. When LED2 goes off and LED1 starts to flash
green slowly at two-flash intervals, the SCU upgrade is finished.
11. Switch the main power switch off.
12. Remove the IC card from the SCU slot. This completes the firmware update
procedure.
13. Attach the rear cover and the interface board cover.
14. Start the main machine power and continue normal operation.
If the LEDs did not change to show the end of the procedure, then the upgrade did
not end correctly. Switch the main power switch off and do the procedure again.
5-4
13 February 2004 INITIAL SETTINGS
Exit
B125S904.WMF
Service
Tables
• Push the applicable number on the 10-key pad to open the menus for
" General Features, ' Timer Settings, or ( Key Operator Tools.
• To open submenus for two-digit numbers with a zero at the start, you must input
the two numbers. If a user tool has a number “01” or “02” for example, you must
push #" or #'.
• Only 4 items can be shown on the LCD. Push “Next” to see the next 4 items.
• Push “Prev” to show the previous items.
• Push “PrevMenu” to go back to the initial user tools screen.
• To go back to the initial copier display, push the “User Tools” key. (You can also
push the key below “Exit” on the LCD to go out from the user tools.)
5-5
INITIAL SETTINGS 13 February 2004
5-6
13 February 2004 INITIAL SETTINGS
2 Timer Settings
Service
Tables
In the table below:
• “Energy Saver” must not be adjusted unless the customer agrees.
• The customer engineer must check and adjust the shaded items when the
machine is installed.
Item Default Setting
*1
01 Auto Off Timer 14 min.
02 Energy Saver (Lower Power Mode) 7 min.
03 Panel Off Timer On 60 sec.
04 System Auto Reset On 60 sec.
05 Date None
06 Time None
*1
Adjusts auto off for Energy Star and must not be changed unless the customer
agrees.
5-7
INITIAL SETTINGS 13 February 2004
Copier Features
• Push the “User Tools” key to go into the user tools mode. The initial user tool
mode screen is shown.
Exit
B125S906.WMF
• Push the applicable key on the 10-key pad to use an item in the menu.
5-8
13 February 2004 INITIAL SETTINGS
1. General Features
Item Default Setting
01 Change Initial Mode Standard
02 Copier Auto Reset Timer 60 sec.
03 Original Priority Text
04 Auto Density Priority On
05 Adjust Scan Density 4
06 Auto Paper Select Priority On
07 Paper Tray Priority Paper Roll 1
08 Copy Start Method Auto
09 Original Size Detect Auto
10 Max. Number of Sets 20 sheets
11 Noise Reduction Text: Off
Text/Photo: Off
Photo: Off
Drawing: Off
Pale: Off
Generation Copy: Off
Background Lines: Off
Sharpen Text: Off
12 Original Mode Quality Text: Normal
Text/Photo: Normal
Photo: Normal
Drawing: Normal
Pale: Normal
Service
Tables
Generation Copy: Normal
Background Lines: Normal
12 Original Mode Quality Sharpen Text: Normal
13 Original Mode Density Text: Normal
Text/Photo: Normal
Photo: Normal
Drawing: Normal
Pale: Normal
Generation Copy: Normal
Background Lines: Normal
Sharpen Text: Normal
14 Copy Mode in Sort Copy After Scan
15 Sample Copy Pattern 0 mm
16 Partial Copy Size Start Position: 0 mm
Copy Size: 280 mm
17 Count Display Original
18 Rotate Copy in APS On
5-9
INITIAL SETTINGS 13 February 2004
2. Reproduction Ratio
Item Default Setting
01 User Reduce/Enlarge Ratio: 1-3 100%
02 Preset Reduce/Enlarge Priority Metric Version: 100%
Inch Version: (Engineering): 100%
Inch Version: (Architecture): 100%
03 User Auto Reduce/Enlarge Metric Version: None (1-to-1)
Inch Version (Engineering): None (1-to-1)
Inch Version (Architecture): None (1-to-1)
04 User Auto Reduce/Enlarge Original Vertical
3. Edit
Item Default Setting
01 Margin Adjustment Metric Version: Top +20 mm, Bottom +20
Inch Version: Top +0.8", Bottom +0.8"
02 Shift Image Metric Version: Up 20 mm, Right 20 mm
Inch Version: Up 0.8", Right 0.8"
03 Erase Border Width Metric Version: 10 mm
Inch Version: 0.4"
04 Repeat Separation Line Metric Version: 10 mm
Inch Version: 0.4"
05 Double Copies Separation Line 2 x Copies Separation Line
06 Program/Delete Overlay Format Prog. Overlay Function
4. Stamp*
Item Default Setting
01 Format Priority MM/DD/YYYY
02 Stamp Settings
01 Orientation Normal
02 Position (upper left)
03 Size 1X
• The “Stamp” feature will not display until the stamp board has been installed and
the stamp feature has been switched on with SP5137 (Stamp Function On/Off).
5-10
13 February 2004 PRINTING TEST PATTERNS
Service
Tables
13 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot (128-dot interval)
14 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot - even/odd reversal (128-dot interval)
15 Slanting cross stripe 2 dots (128-dot interval)
16 Slanting cross stripe 2 dots - even/odd reversal (128-dot interval)
17 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot (64-dot interval)
18 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot - even/odd reversal (64-dot interval)
19 Rope pattern 1 dot
20 Rope pattern 1 dot main scan even/odd reversal
21 Rope pattern 2 dots
22 Rope pattern 1 dot main scan even/odd reversal
23 Rope pattern
24 Frequency characteristic - Vertical
25 Frequency characteristic - Horizontal
26 Frequency characteristic - Vertical/Horizontal
27 Gray scale 5 - Vertical/Horizontal
28 Gray scale 6 - Vertical/Horizontal
29 Black
30 White
32 Gray scale 7 - Vertical/Horizontal
33 Independent 1 dot (16-dot interval)
34 Independent 1 dot (32-dot interval)
35 Independent 1 dot (64-dot interval)
36 Independent 1 dot (128-dot interval)
37 Independent 1 dot (256-dot interval)
5-11
PRINTING TEST PATTERNS 13 February 2004
Item Pattern
38 Independent 2 dots (16-dot interval)
39 Independent 2 dots (32-dot interval)
40 Independent 2 dots (64-dot interval)
41 Independent 2 dots (128-dot interval)
42 Independent 2 dots (256-dot interval)
43 Independent 1 dot (4-dot interval)
44 Independent 1 dot (8-dot interval)
45 Independent 2 dots (8-dot interval)
5-12
13 February 2004 PRINTING TEST PATTERNS
Service
Tables
deviation in the printer engine
5-13
INPUT CHECK 13 February 2004
5-14
13 February 2004 INPUT CHECK
Service
Tables
bit-6 Not used ---
bit-5 Not used ---
bit-4 Not used ---
bit-3 I/O port SW** content DFU
bit-2 I/O port SW** content DFU
bit-1 I/O port SW** content DFU
bit-0 I/O port SW** content DFU
5-15
INPUT CHECK 13 February 2004
For tables “[8] Scanner 1” and “[9] Scanner 2”, the “Status” column shows the
reading if only one sensor is on. If more than one sensor is on (for example, when
there is a wide sheet of paper in the original feeder), more than one of the digits will
be set to 1.
5-16
13 February 2004 OUTPUT CHECK
Service
21 Not used
Tables
22 Charge Corona Wire Cleaner Motor
23 DFU
24 Toner Supply Clutch
25 Pick-off Pawl Solenoid
26 Used Toner Bottle Motor
27 Not used
28 Not used
29 Not used
30 Quenching Lamp
31 ID Sensor LED (Center)
32 Charge Corona
33 Charge Grid – Image Area
34 Charge Grid – ID Sensor Pattern
35 Charge Corona + Grid – Image Area
36 Development Bias – Image Area
37 Development Bias – ID Sensor Pattern
38 Transfer Corona – Plain Paper: Leading Edge Only
39 Transfer Corona – Plain Paper: Other Than Leading Edge
40 Separation Corona – Plain Paper: Leading Edge
41 Separation Corona – Plain Paper: Other Than Leading Edge
42 Total Counter
43 Dehumidifier
44 Not used
45 Not used
5-17
OUTPUT CHECK 13 February 2004
Item Parts
46 Not used
47 Not used
48 Not used
49 Not used
50 Drum Potential Measuring Mode
51 Not used
52 Not used
53 Scanner Feed Motor – Forward
54 Not used
55 CIS LED
5-18
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
SP1-XXX Feed
Service
1002 Side-to-Side Registration
Tables
001 Paper Roll 1 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for printing.
002 Paper Roll 2 [-10.0 ~ +10.0/0.0/0.1 mm step]
003 Cut Paper Tray • To move the start position to the right, increase
the value (+).
• To move the start position to the left, decrease the
value (–).
005 By-pass feed Note: If you use paper 914 mm wide, adjust in the
range of ±2 mm. If you set the adjustment out of this
range, part of the image will be cut off.
5-19
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-20
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
To enable “inching”, set this SP to 5 or higher.
When inching control is on, the fusing motor turns the hot roller and pressure roller
freely without copy paper between the rollers. This prevents wrinkling with tracing
(translucent) paper and thick paper.
001 Plain [0~30/0/5oC]
002 Translucent
003 Film
5-21
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
Setting Scale
Setting Rate Speed (mm/s)
-50 4.60 62.76
-40 3.68 62.21
-30 2.76 61.66
-20 1.84 61.10
-10 0.92 60.55
0 0 60.00
+10 -0.92 59.45
+20 -1.84 58.90
+30 -2.76 58.34
+40 -3.68 57.79
+50 -4.60 57.24
1911 By-pass Feed Adjusts the time that the customer has to adjust the paper skew
Start Timing manually when by-pass (manual) paper feed is used.
[1.0~8.0/2.0/0.1 second step]
5-22
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
024 Plain Paper Mode 4
025 Plain Paper Mode 5 [-100~+100/22/2] DFU
031 Translucent Mode 1 [-100~+100/18/2] DFU
032 Translucent Mode 2
033 Translucent Mode 3
034 Translucent Mode 4
035 Translucent Mode 5 [-100~+100/28/2] DFU
041 Film Mode 1 [-100~+100/20/2] DFU
042 Film Mode 2
043 Film Mode 3
044 Film Mode 4 [-100~+100/36/2] DFU
045 Film Mode 5 [-100~+100/16/2] DFU
5-23
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-24
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
Translucent [-20.0 ~ +20.0/0/0.1 mm]
126 1st Roll, 2000 mm/78", Translucent Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
[-30.0 ~ +30.0/0/1 mm]
127 1st Roll, 3600 mm/141", Translucent Adjusts the 3600-mm cut length.
[-30.0 ~ +30.0/0/1 mm]
128 1st Roll, 6000 mm/236", Translucent Adjusts the 6000-mm cut length.
[-30.0 ~ +30.0/0/1 mm]
131 1st Roll, 297 mm/11" or 12", Film Adjusts the 297-mm cut length.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0/0/0.1 mm]
132 1st Roll, 420 mm/17" or 18", Film Adjusts the 420-mm cut length.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0/0/0.1 mm]
133 1st Roll, 594 mm/22" or 24", Film Adjusts the 594-mm cut length.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0/0/0.1 mm]
134 1st Roll, 841 mm/32" or 34", Film Adjusts the 841-mm cut length.
[-20.0 ~ +20.0/0/0.1 mm]
135 1st Roll, 1189 mm/44" or 48", Film Adjusts the 1189-mm cut length.
[-20.0 ~ +20.0/0/0.1 mm]
136 1st Roll, 2000 mm/78", Film Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
[-30.0 ~ +30.0/0.0/0.1 mm]
137 1st Roll, 3600 mm/141", Film Adjusts the 3600-mm cut length.
[-30.0 ~ +30.0/0/1 mm]
138 1st Roll, 6000 mm/236", Film Adjusts the 6000-mm cut length.
[-30.0 ~ +30.0/0/1 mm]
211 2nd Roll, 297 mm/11" or 12", Plain Adjusts the 297-mm cut length.
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0/0/0.1 mm]
212 2nd Roll, 420 mm/17" or 18", Plain Adjusts the 420-mm cut length.
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0/0/0.1 mm]
5-25
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-26
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
5-27
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
SP2-XXX Drum
2001 Charge Corona Adjustment
001 Image Area Adjusts the charge corona output. DFU
[505~1530/1220/1 V step]
002 Grid for Image Area Adjusts the charge grid output. DFU
[162~1080/770/1 V step]
003 Grid for ID Sensor Adjusts the charge grid output for the ID sensor pattern.
Pattern DFU
[162~1080/635/1 V step]
5-28
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
008 Translucent - Coefficient Adjusts the transfer output coefficient for the leading
edge, central image, and trailing edge. DFU
[1.0~2.0/1.0/0.2 step]
009 Film - Leading Edge Adjusts the transfer output power. DFU
010 Film - Central Image [0~230/80/1 mm]
011 Film - Trailing Edge
012 Film - Coefficient Adjusts the transfer output coefficient for the leading
edge, central image, and trailing edge. DFU
[1.0 ~ 2.0/1.0/0.2 step]
5-29
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-30
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
DFU
Tables
[0~30/8/1 mm]
003 Trailing Edge Adjusts the timing to switch from the center to the trailing edge.
DFU
[-30 ~ 0/0/-1 mm]
5-31
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-32
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
• The machine writes an ID sensor pattern on the surface of the drum.
• The ID sensor reads the density of the ID sensor pattern and converts it to an
electrical signal (Vsp).
• The machine compares the Vsp value with Vsg, which is read from the bare
surface of the drum (Vsg/Vsg=Vref)
• If Vsp/Vsg < Vref (the value of this SP setting), recovery is completed and the
machine goes back to normal operation.
001 Recovery Level DFU Sets the recovery level: Vsp/Vsg < Vref
[0~17/5/0.25 step]
0: 0.075 6: 0.130 12: 0.165
1: 0.100 7: 0.135 13: 0.170
2: 0.125 8: 0.140 14: 0.180
3: 0.150 9: 0.145 15: 0.185
4: 0.175 10: 0.155 16: 0.190
5: 0.200 11: 0.160 17: 0.195
5-33
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-34
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
[0~1/0/1]
0: FGATE IPU
1: FGATE IOB
003 Pattern
Sets the test pattern.
[0 ~ 5/0/1 step]
0: None
1: Vertical Lines: 2-dot 5.4 pitch
2: Horizontal Lines: 2-dot 5.4 pitch
3: Vertical Lines: 2-dot
4: A0T (A0 SEF)
5: Grid Pattern
004 SP Pattern
“SP Copy” refers to when you make a print while you are in the SP mode. To do this,
you push the Interrupt key to see the Copy screen. After the print is finished, the
screen goes back immediately to the SP mode.
Sets the pattern for copy tests in the SP mode.
[1~3/3/1]
1: Vertical Lines
2: Horizontal Lines
3: Grid Pattern
5-35
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-36
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
2966 Toner Save Mode DFU
Sets the matrix that is used to decrease the quantity of toner on the printed page.
[0~2/0/1]
5-37
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-38
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
SP4-XXX Scanner
Service
Tables
4013 Scanner Free Run
002 Page Interval Setting Adjusts the interval between prints for the printer free run
(see the description for 5802).
[0 ~ 500/10/0.1 s]
5-39
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-40
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
0: None 1: Weak 2: Medium 3: Strong
009 Sub Scan – Text/Photo
010 Pale [0~8/5/1]]
0: Low (better thin line reproduction)
5: Off
8: High (better thick line reproduction)
011 Main Scan – Pale [0~3/0/1]
0: None 1: Weak 2: Medium 3: Strong
012 Sub Scan – Pale
013 Generation [0~8/3/1]]
0: Low (better thin line reproduction)
5: Off
8: High (better thick line reproduction)
014 Main Scan – Generation [0~3/2/1]
0: None 1: Weak 2: Medium 3: Strong
015 Sub Scan – Generation [0~3/0/1]
0: None 1: Weak 2: Medium 3: Strong
016 Background Line [0~8/4/1]]
0: Low (better thin line reproduction)
5: Off
8: High (better thick line reproduction)
017 Main Scan – [0~3/2/1]
Background Line 0: None 1: Weak 2: Medium 3: Strong
018 Sub Scan – Background [0~3/0/1]
Line 0: None 1: Weak 2: Medium 3: Strong
5-41
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-42
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
Notes:
• The “0” setting switches independent dot erase off.
• A low setting makes the effect weaker, and erases a smaller number of dots.
• A high setting makes the effect stronger and erases more dots. With a high setting,
it is more possible to erase details in images, specially in the Photo and Text/Photo
modes.
• “L”, “M”, and “H” refer to the “Soft”, “Normal”, and “Sharp” settings that can be made
for each original mode on the operation panel. Each setting can be adjusted
independently.
• Blue Line Erase = Background Lines mode
• Photo 2 mode = Sharpen Text mode
070 L: Text [0~14/4/1]
071 M: Text [0~14/7/1]
072 H: Text [0~14/10/1]
073 L: Photo [0~14/4/1]
074 M: Photo [0~14/7/1]
075 H: Photo [0~14/10/1]
076 L: Text/Photo [0~14/4/1]
077 M: Text/Photo [0~14/7/1]
078 H: Text/Photo [0~14/10/1]
079 L: Pale [0~14/4/1]
080 M: Pale [0~14/7/1]
081 H: Pale [0~14/10/1]
082 L: Generation [0~14/5/1]
083 M: Generation [0~14/8/1]
084 H: Generation [0~14/11/1]
085 L: Background Line [0~14/4/1]
5-43
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-44
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
5-45
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
4960 HDD
001 Media Check Input “1” to detect defective sectors on the hard
disk.
At the factory, the original defective sector data is stored in the non-volatile memory.
This data lets the hard disk prevent access to the defective sectors. If other sectors
become defective after the machine leaves the factory, this sector data must also be
stored in non-volatile memory, to prevent output of defective images. During media
checks, new defective sector data is stored in the IPU non-volatile memory. This data
allows the IPU to prevent access to the bad sectors. The display shows the progress of
the test by numbers that increase from 0 to 100. The time necessary for the test
depends on the hardware specifications.
003 Formatting Input “1” to format the hard disk.
The time necessary for formatting depends on the hardware specifications. If defective
sectors are not found, check SP4960-001. If a defective sector is found, more time is
necessary for sector substitution.
005 Spindle Control Push Off or On to switch the hard disk off and on.
The hard disk usually stops when possible, to prevent noise and to protect the hard
disk. But, if the hard disk stops, the copy speed may decrease, because the machine
stops until the hard disk starts.
007 Bad Sector Information Reset
Do this SP to erase the bad sector data from the NVRAM.
Do this setting after you remove a defective disk and replace it with a new disk.
009 Bad Sector Display
Shows the number of defective sectors on the hard disk. The number comes from the
defective sector data that the IPU made during operation. When the number gets to
51, SC361 is shown. Then you must format the hard disk with SP4960 003. Refer to
SC361 in the Troubleshooting section for more.
011 Model Name Display
Shows the hard disk model name (40 characters) on the display.
013 IDE Interface Form Selection DFU
Sets the data transfer format.
Push the key for Ultra DMA or Multi Word DMA
015 HDD Connection On/Off
Push “On” or “Off” to enable or disable hard disk detection. Set to “Off” if the hard disk
becomes defective. In this condition, the customer can continue to use the copier
functions until a new disk is installed.
5-46
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
004 CIS Main Scan Line Offset – No. 4-5
005 CIS Sub Scan Line Offset – No. 1-2 [0~2047/638/1]
006 CIS Sub Scan Line Offset – No. 2-3 [0~2047/650/1]
007 CIS Sub Scan Line Offset – No. 3-4 [0~2047/12/1]
008 CIS Sub Scan Line Offset – No. 4-5 [0~2047/638/1]
5-47
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-48
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
SP5-XXX Mode
Service
Tables
5011 Stamp Language Selection
Lets you set one primary and one secondary language. The settings are different for
each country.
Location Language 1 Language 2 Comments
Japan Japanese English 0: The machine uses the “Language 1”
China Chinese English settings.
US, UK, 1: The machine uses the “Language 2”
English English settings.
Korea
France French English
Germany German English
Italy Italian English
Holland Dutch English
Spain Spanish English
Portugal Portuguese English
Russia Russian English
5-49
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-50
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
133 A4 SEF
141 B4 SEF
Inch
128 Other
225 36 inch
226 24 inch
227 18 inch
228 12 inch
229 9 inch
230 30 inch
234 34 inch
235 22 inch
236 17 inch
237 11 inch
238 8½ inch
160 11 x 17 SEF
164 8½ x 14 SEF
165 8½ x 13 SEF
166 8½ x 11 SEF
184 12 x 18 SEF
5-51
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-52
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
5803 Input Check Lets you test inputs from different components (☛ 5.5)
5-53
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5907 Plug & Play Sets the maker name (20 bytes) and model name (50 bytes).
Maker Name Model Name
1: RICOH imagio Wide 6020
2: RICOH Aficio 240W
3: NRG A045
4: SAVIN 2400WE
5: Gestetner A045
6: LANIER LW310
5-54
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
5958 6 m Setting
Enables or disables the optional special-order firmware that is used to increase the
maximum original and copy lengths to 6 meters.
[0 ~ 1/0/1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
Service
Tables
1: Enable
5-55
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-56
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
022 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 4A1
023 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 5A1
024 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 6A1
025 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 7A1
026 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 2A0
027 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 3A0
028 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 4A0
029 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 5A0
030 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 841 mm
031 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 594 mm
032 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 420 mm
033 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 297 mm
034 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 210 mm
035 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom Bypass
050 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B4 SEF
051 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B3 SEF
052 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B3 LEF
053 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B2 SEF
054 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B2 LEF
055 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B1 SEF
056 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: 2B2
057 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: 3B2
058 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: 2B1
059 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: 3B1
060 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: 4B1
061 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: Custom 728 mm
5-57
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-58
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
016 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: A1 LEF
017 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: A0 SEF
018 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 2A2
019 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 2A2
020 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 2A1
021 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 3A1
022 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 4A1
023 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 5A1
024 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 6A1
025 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 7A1
026 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 2A0
027 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 3A0
028 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 4A0
029 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: 5A0
030 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 841 mm
031 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 594 mm
032 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 420 mm
033 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 297 mm
034 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom 210 mm
035 Original Size: Metric: Std. A: Custom Bypass
050 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B4 SEF
051 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B3 SEF
052 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B3 LEF
053 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B2 SEF
054 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B2 LEF
055 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: B1 SEF
056 Original Size: Metric: Std. B: 2B2
5-59
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-60
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
5-61
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-62
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
013 Fine Tune
5-63
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-64
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
7403 SC History
Shows the 10 most recent SC code numbers.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1st
003 Latest 2nd
004 Latest 3rd
005 Latest 4th
006 Latest 5th
007 Latest 6th
008 Latest 7th
009 Latest 8th
010 Latest 9th
Service
Tables
007 Latest 6th
008 Latest 7th
009 Latest 8th
010 Latest 9th
5-65
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-66
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
184 12 x 18 Cut SEF
225 36 inch Roll
226 24 inch Roll
227 18 inch Roll
228 12 inch Roll
229 9 inch Roll
230 30 inch Roll
234 34 inch Roll
235 22 inch Roll
236 17 inch Roll
237 11 inch Roll
238 8.5 inch Roll
5-67
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-68
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
Do this SP to reset the electronic total counter.
This SP mode does not show that the counter can be reset. Check the initial settings
counter, to see if this is possible. When the electronic counter is more than 0, the
mechanical total counter starts counting. (The initial value of the mechanical total
counter is 0.)
5-69
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES 13 February 2004
5-70
13 February 2004 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
Service
Tables
8901 Toner Cartridge Count: Previous
Shows the number of meters and pages that were made with the previous toner bottle.
001 Pages
010 Meters
5-71
13 February 2004 OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MACHINE GENERAL LAYOUT
1 2 3
4
6
Descriptions
Detailed
B125D969.WMF
6-1
OVERVIEW 13 February 2004
2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
1 10
11
12
29 13
14
28
15
27
16
26
17
25
18
24
19
23
22
20
21
B125D969.WMF
6-2
13 February 2004 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
6-3
OVERVIEW 13 February 2004
1
2
B125D970.WMF
3
1. Scanner Motor
2. Drum Motor
3. Main Motor
4. Fusing Motor
6-4
13 February 2004 OVERVIEW
1
4
5
7
B125D971.WMF
Descriptions
2. Original Path (Upper) Upper output stacker installed.
Detailed
3. Original Path (Straight-Through) Upper output stacker removed.
4. Paper Path (Upper) Normal (Default)
5. Paper Path (Rear) Selectable*1
6. Paper Path (Paper Cassette)
7. Paper Path (Rolls) B461 (1 Roll), B462 (2 Rolls)
1
* The position of the copy-exit selection lever on the rear top edge of the machine controls
where the copy feeds out.
Lever UP Lever DOWN
The operator pushes the “Upper Copy The “Upper Copy Output” key is disabled
Output” key to set the exit: and the copy always feeds out at 4. For
• Key lamp ON: Copy feeds out at 2. normal operation, the lever must be up; this
• Key lamp OFF: Copy feeds out at 4 enables the “Upper Copy Output” key.
6-5
SCANNER 13 February 2004
6.2 SCANNER
6.2.1 OVERVIEW
[E]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[A] [B] [C] [H] B125D101.WMF
6-6
13 February 2004 SCANNER
24.5 132.2
10 32
[G]
CIS CIS
B125D951.WMF
[A] [B] [C] [D]
[E] [F]
Descriptions
[E]: CIS. Scans the original and sends the image data to the VDB.
Detailed
[F]: Original Exit Sensor. Detects the leading and trailing edge of the original for job
timing.
[G]: Original Exit Roller. Feeds the original out of the machine.
6-7
SCANNER 13 February 2004
➀
➁
➂
➃
B125D103.WMF
Six sensors below the original feed table detect the original width. These are the
five original width sensors and the original set sensor, which is also used as an
original width sensor.
• The original set sensor [A] detects A4 or B4 SEF and North American A size
originals.
• The original width sensors [B] to [F] detect larger sizes.
The “Original Size Detect” user tool setting controls the types of original sizes that
the machine detects: User Tools→ 1. System Settings→ 1. General Settings→ 2.
Original Size Detect.
• In the metric model, this is either A series or B series.
• In the inch model, this is either Engineering (ANSI) or Architecture.
Metric
EU ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
A Series A4 SEF A3 SEF A2 SEF A1 SEF A0 SEF 914 mm
B Series B4 SEF B3 SEF B2 SEF B1 SEF 880 mm 914 mm
Inch
NA ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
Eng. (ANSI) 81/2" 11" 17" 22" 30" 34"
Arch. 9" 12" 18" 24" 30" 36"
6-8
13 February 2004 SCANNER
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B125D102.WMF
The scanner motor [A] (a stepper motor) and timing belt [B] control the original feed
rollers [C] and original exit rollers [C]. The signal from the original set sensor
controls the on/off timing.
Descriptions
Detailed
Original
Speed
240 mm/s
60 mm/s
15 mm/s
6-9
SCANNER 13 February 2004
[A]
B125D104.WMF
This machine uses a contact image sensor [A] (!: Digital Processes – Image
Processing – Black and White CIS Systems).
The scanning unit is below the original feed path. The CIS scans black and white
originals a maximum of 926.5 mm (361/2 inches) wide at 600 dpi.
[B] [B] [B] [B]
CIS-2 CIS-4
CIS 1 CIS 3 CIS 5
B125D910.WMF
Original Feed
The CIS unit is made of 5 sections connected at four joints [B]. If you look from
above, the CIS sections are numbered from left to right as CIS-1 to CIS-5.
Printed Image
Abc
CIS-5 CIS-4 CIS-3 CIS-2 CIS-1
B125D911.WMF
When you look at the copy to identify the areas scanned by each section, the
numbering is in the opposite sequence, with CIS-5 on the left to CIS-1 on the right.
6-10
13 February 2004 SCANNER
B125D101.WMF
[B]
Contact Image Sensor (Center)
70 mm 70 mm
5 mm
Descriptions
Texture detection Area Detailed
B125D514.WMF
Then, during scanning, the CIS corrects the image density line by line. To do this, it
starts 5 mm from the leading edge of the original [B], and reads 70 mm to the left
and to the right of the center.
6-11
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
LEDs
(Operation
Panel)
OPU
Control I/O
B125D912.WMF
This block diagram shows the components of the image processing circuit.
6-12
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Appl. I/F
Appl.
Controller
VDIP
RI1001-1
8 MHz
(Printer Application)
16.66
MHz
LVDS I/F
OIPU VDB
(LPH)
RI1001-2
RI1001-3 HDC
Descriptions
Detailed
MCU IMAC D
SDRAM HDD
IPU
Image Data
LVDS Signal
Control Signal
Clock Signal
B125D913.WMF
6-13
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
- MTF filtering
- Smoothing
Filtering - Independent dot erasure
- Line width correction
Ri-10
- Gamma correction
Image Processing - Binary processing
- Dither processing
Application
VDB/LPH
B125D512.WMF
6-14
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Mode Function
Text Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Text mode does not detect
differences between areas of the page that contain text, graphics, or
photographs; all the page is processed as a text original. But,
straight lines are sharp in the copies. When Text is set, the auto
image density feature (ADS) is automatically switched on.
Photo The 2-value dither processing used in this mode removes jagged
edges on photo originals. Gives the best reproduction for copied
photographs. When Photo is set, the auto image density feature
(ADS) is automatically switched off.
Text/Photo The 2-level error diffusion used in this mode gives the best
reproduction for originals with text and photos on the same page.
Grayscales are more accurate than those got with Text mode. When
Text/Photo is set, the auto image density feature (ADS) is
automatically switched on.
Pale Best reproduction of originals which may not be easy to scan.
Examples are documents with marks in pencil, thin sheets, copies of
copies of forms, and originals of low contrast for which enhancement
may be necessary. When Pale is set, the auto density feature (ADS)
is automatically switched on.
Generation Almost the same as the Text mode, but tries to decrease the
thickness of thick characters, repair thin or broken lines of originals,
ignore the background, and erase independent dots that are
frequently in copies of originals which are 2nd, 3rd, etc. generation
copies themselves.
Descriptions
Background Lines Ignores blue lines in the original. For example, the blue grid squares
Detailed
of graph paper, or the markings with a dropout blue pencil do not
show in copies. When Background Lines is set, the auto density
feature (ADS) is automatically switched on.
Sharpen Text Good for copying posters that contain photos with text overlays.
Drawing Best reproduction of detailed diagrams, specially for drawings with
many thin lines. When Drawing is set, the auto density feature (ADS)
is automatically switched on.
Tables on the pages after this show the SP modes that can be used for each
original mode. But, the following SP settings are only effective if the “Copier
Features → General Features → Original Mode Quality” user tool is set to “Custom
Setting”
6-15
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
Text Mode
Image Processing Flow Related SP/UP Modes
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering SP4906-20~23
MTF Filtering
Independent dot erase settings
Independent Dot Erasure
SP4905-01-03
Line Width Correction
Line thickness mode settings
SP4906 70~72
Independent dot erase settings
User Tool*1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool *2
Filter strength (Normal, or
Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool *3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Quality SP4903 01
Processing Error Diffusion Selects the level of the image
smoothing filter.
6-16
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode
Image Processing Flow Related SP/UP Modes
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering Independent Dot Erase SP4906 24~27
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Filter Settings)
SP4906 73~75
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Independent Dot Erase)
SP4905 04~06
Line thickness selections (main
and sub scan).
User Tool *1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool *2
Filter strength (Normal, or
Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool *3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Quality SP4903 21
Dithering
Processing Selects the type of dithering
Descriptions
Detailed
*1 User Tools ! → 2. Copier → 11 Noise Reduction → Photo
*2 User Tools ! → 2. Copier → 12 Original Mode Quality → Photo
*3 User Tools ! → 2. Copier → 13 Original Mode Density → Photo
6-17
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
Text/Photo Mode
Image Processing Flow Related SP/UP Modes
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering SP4906 28~31
MTF Filtering
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Independent Dot Erasure
Settings (Filter Settings)
Line Width Correction
SP4906 76~78
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Independent Dot Erase
Settings)
SP4905 07~09
Line width correction settings
User Tool*1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool*2
Filter strength adjustment
(Normal, or Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool*3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Quality SP4903 03
Processing Error Diffusion Image Setting – Smoothing Filter
Level (Text/Photo)
6-18
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Pale Mode
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering MTF Filtering SP4905 10~12
Independent Dot Erasure Line Thickness Mode – Pale
Originals.
SP4906 32~35
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Filter Settings)
SP4906 79~81
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Independent Dot
Erase).
User Tool *1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool *2
Filter strength adjustment
(Normal, or Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool *3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Quality SP4903 04
Processing Error Diffusion Image Setting – Smoothing Filter
Descriptions
Detailed
Level (Pale)
6-19
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
Generation
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering MTF Filtering SP4905 13~15
Independent Dot Erasure Line Thickness Mode –
Line Width Correction Generation (Main and Sub Scan)
SP4906 36~39
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Filter Settings)
SP4906 82~84
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Dot Erase Settings)
User Tool *1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool *2
Filter strength adjustment
(Normal, or Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool *3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Quality SP4903 05
Processing Error Diffusion Image Setting – Smoothing Filter
Level (Generation)
6-20
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Drawing Mode
Image Processing Flow Related SP/UP Modes
Descriptions
Processing Error Diffusion Image Setting – Smoothing Filter
Detailed
Level
6-21
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering MTF Filtering SP4905 16~18
Independent Dot Erasure Line Thickness Mode (Blue Line
Line Width Correction Erase – Main and Sub Scan).
SP4906 40~43
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Filter Settings – Blue
Line Erase)
SP4906 85~87
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Independent Dot
Erase – Blue Line Erase)
User Tool *1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool *2
Filter strength adjustment
(Normal, or Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool *3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Quality SP4903 06
Processing Error Diffusion Image Setting – Smoothing
Filter Level (Blue Line Erase)
6-22
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4911-01~06
Processing Conversion Magnification corrections
↓
Filtering MTF Filtering SP4905 19~21
Line Thickness Mode (Photo 2 –
Main and Sub Scan).
SP4906 44~47
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Filter Settings – Photo
ED)
SP4906 88~90
Filter/Independent Dot Erase
Settings (Independent Dot
Erase – Photo 2)
User Tool *1
Independent dot erase level
User Tool *2
Filter strength adjustment
(Normal, or Custom Setting)
↓
Density Control User Tool *3
γ Correction
Density adjustment
↓
Descriptions
Quality SP4903-07
Detailed
Processing Error Diffusion Image Setting – Smoothing
Filter Level (Photo 2).
6-23
IMAGE PROCESSING 13 February 2004
As shown in the table below, for SP values near the right, more dots are erased.
SP Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Text Mode 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 96 112 128 144
Example — OFF — L — — M — — H — — — —
L: Low, M: Medium, H: High
Target pixel
This area is tested before application of independent dot erase.
40 20 40 30 20 40 30
30 30 0 70 30 30 50
55 53 30 20 40 0 10 30 40 50 30 10 50 30 55 55 53 30 20 40 0 10 30 40 50
40 50 20 0 30 0 40
30 20 30 40 30 30 20
6-24
13 February 2004 IMAGE PROCESSING
Descriptions
Detailed
6-25
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
9
4
6 B125D401.WMF
6-26
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[G]
[C]
[F]
[D]
B125D404.WMF
Descriptions
When paper feed starts:
Detailed
• The drum motor switches on and turns the drum forward.
• While the drum turns forward, the LPH writes the ID sensor pattern on the drum,
then the drum turns forward 250 mm more.
• The ID sensor reads the pattern (Vsp) and the surface of the drum (Vsg) to find
Vsp/Vsg for toner density control.
The drum motor turns the drum in the opposite direction at the end of each job for
0.1 s. This removes paper dust (caused when the paper roll is cut) from the
cleaning blade. The cleaning interval (number of jobs) can be adjusted with
SP2812 (Drum Cleaning Interval).
6-27
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
[A]
B125D405.WMF
The charge corona unit [A], above the OPC drum, uses the Scorotron (Negative)
Charge Method (! Photocopying Processes – Charge – Corona Charge)
There is one gold-plated charge wire behind some grid wires. The grid wires make
sure that the charge on the OPC drum is constant.
Charges used for this machine:
• Grid: -800 V
• Drum surface: -850 V
• Corona wire: About 1200 µA
6-28
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[C]
[D]
[B]
(
[A]
B125D405.WMF
The corona wire is cleaned immediately after the main power switch or operation
power switch is switched on, if these two conditions occur at the same time:
• 600 m of paper fed through the machine since the last wire cleaning
• The temperature of the hot roller is less than 50°C (122°F).
The interval between automatic wire cleaning (Default: 600 m) can be adjusted with
SP2804. This SP can also be set to clean the corona wire immediately after the
machine is switched on.
The wire cleaner motor [A] controls the cleaning pad [B].
Descriptions
Detailed
When the cleaning pad gets to the left side (as shown above), the motor changes
direction and pulls the cleaning pad back to the home position on the right.
If the cleaning pad is not at the home position immediately after the main power is
switched on, the cleaning pad goes back to home position.
The actuator [C] for the wire cleaner sensor [D] turns while the cleaner moves. The
signals from this sensor tell the machine when the cleaning pad moves. If the wire
cleaner stops before it gets to the end, or if stops too long at the far left position,
the wire cleaner sensor detects an error.
6-29
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
B125D401.WMF
B125D972.WMF
This machine uses a counter blade system to clean toner from the surface of the
drum. (! Photocopying Processes – Cleaning – Counter Blade)
The cleaning blade [A] is opposite to the direction that the drum turns.
The counter blade has a lever [B] on the bottom side of the upper unit.
• Set [B] to the right: The blade touches the drum for normal operation.
• Set [B] to the left: The blade is away from the drum.
This lever must be set to the left at the following times:
• Before you remove the OPC drum
• Before you move the machine a long distance
NOTE: If you will move the machine to a different location on the same floor,
then it is not necessary to move the lever to the left.
6-30
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B125D406.WMF
The cleaning unit auger [A] pushes toner into the used toner collection bottle [B].
The used toner bottle motor [C] moves a cam [D] from side to side, to hit the side of
the used toner collection bottle. This causes a vibration, and this keeps the level of
used toner in the bottle flat.
The motor operation timing is controlled by SP 2926, as follows:
• 2926 004 at 1 (default setting): The motor switches on at the end of the job if 10
m of paper was fed since the last time that the motor operated. SP 2926 001 and
002 are not used.
• 2926 004 at 0: The motor switches on at these times:
Descriptions
a) 10 seconds after the main power switch is switched on, if the fusing
Detailed
temperature is less than 50 °C. The motor switches on for the length of time
stored in SP 2926 001 (default setting: 30 seconds).
b) At the end of each job, after the last page of the job goes by the exit sensor.
The motor switches on for the length of time that is set with SP 2926 002 (default
setting: 0).
The motor stops if the user starts a job. The motor does not switch on during
copying.
When the used toner overflow sensor [E] detects that the used toner tank is full, the
overflow indicator on the operation panel starts to flash. Then:
• Printing can continue until the end of the job. But, if 10 more meters are printed
before the end of the job, printing stops at the 10-meter point.
• After 10 meters of copying, or at the end of the job, the overflow indicator stops
flashing and stays on. The machine cannot be used until you remove the used
toner from the collection bottle.
NOTE: The length of paper that can be printed after the toner-bottle-full
indication can be made shorter or longer with SP2926 03 (Used Toner
Control – Used Toner Overflow Detection).
6-31
AROUND THE DRUM 13 February 2004
6.4.7 QUENCHING
[A]
[B]
B125D402.WMF
The quenching lamp [A], an array of LEDs, is behind the LPH [B].
After the drum [A] is cleaned by the cleaning blade, light from the quenching lamp
removes unwanted charge on the drum. This prepares the drum for the subsequent
copy cycle.
The quenching lamp switches on and off with the drum motor (the lamp stays on
while the OPC drum turns).
6-32
13 February 2004 AROUND THE DRUM
[B]
[A]
B125D973.WMF
The two heaters [A] below the drum prevent condensation around the drum and
T&S unit.
A cooling fan [B] moves the air.
The on/off timing of these heaters is:
• When the main power switch or operation switch is switched on, the heaters
switch off.
Descriptions
• When the main power switch or operation switch is switched off, the heaters
Detailed
switch on.
6-33
IMAGE WRITING MECHANISM 13 February 2004
[C]
[D]
[E]
B125D401.WMF
B125D974.WMF
[F] [G]
LPH 2
LPH 1 LPH 3
Front
B125D915.WMF
This machine uses an LPH (LED Print Head) [A] that sends light directly to the
OPC drum to make a latent image.
The A0-size 600-dpi print head is an array of connected self-focusing lenses [B]
above an LED array [C] and drive board [D], and attached to a heat sink [E].
NOTE: The maximum printing width of the print head is 914 mm (36").
The LPH has three sections: LPH 1, LPH 2, and LPH 3. The two joints between the
sections are identified as LPH 1-2 [F] and LPH-2-3 [G].
6-34
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
6.6 DEVELOPMENT
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
9 1 2
3
8
4
7
5
B125D302.WMF
6
Descriptions
Detailed
4. OPC Drum 9. Separator
5. Development Roller
NOTE: The development unit does not have a TD sensor. The machine uses only
the ID sensor for toner supply control.
6-35
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
[A]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[B]
B125D304.WMF
6-36
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
[C]
[A]
[D]
B125D302.WMF
[B]
Descriptions
[C] and the drum [D].To control the quantity of toner that is supplied to the
Detailed
development unit, the machine switches the toner supply clutch on and off. The
output from the ID sensor controls the clutch on/off timing. This development unit
does not have a TD sensor.
6-37
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
[F]
[C]
[A]
[G]
[E]
[B]
[D]
B125D303.WMF
6-38
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
[B]
[A]
B125D904.WMF
The CGB power pack [A] applies a negative bias (-650V) to the development roller
[B], slightly higher than the remaining charge on the drum.
The development bias during copying is set by SP 2201 001 (Development Bias
Adjustment – Image Area).
Descriptions
Detailed
6-39
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
6.6.6 ID SENSOR
B125D905.WMF
[A]
6-40
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
SW OFF
Vsg/Vsp = 04./4.0 = 0.1 (Normal) Vsg/Vsp = 04./3.0 = 0.13 (Add Toner)
B125D960.WMF
Vsg is checked one time only, when these two conditions occur at the same time:
• The machine is switched on with the main power switch or the operation switch
• The upper unit is closed.
At power on, the drum turns freely for 35 s to clean the surface of the drum against
the cleaning blade. When the machine makes the first copy after the power is
swirched on, to calculate Vsp/Vsg it uses:
• The Vsg value measured immediately after power on.
• The last Vsp value measured before the machine was switched off.
After this, the machine uses the Vsg value measured immediately after the power
is switched on. But Vsp is measured after each copy.
The machine releases toner to the development unit when the value calculated for
Vsp/Vsg is more than 0.1. During standard operation, if Vsp/Vsg = 0.1 no toner is
supplied.
The timing chart on the next page shows the warm-up sequence. 'This sequence
occurs immediately after the machine is switched on. The machine measures
Vsp/Vsg during warm-up. This prevents dirty background on the first copies after
warm-up when hot roller temperature is less than 50°C.
NOTES:
Descriptions
• If SP2804 (Corona Wire Cleaning Interval) is set to clean the charge corona wire
Detailed
during warm-up, Vsp/Vsg is measured after the wire is cleaned.
• SP2924 controls whether Vsg is measured during the warm-up sequence. For
more, refer to “4. Service Tables”.
• If the machine is switched off and on after the warm-up sequence when Vsg is
less than 2.5V, the warm-up sequence is done; the setting of SP2924 (Warm-up
Control) is ignored.
6-41
Vsg Sampling During Warm-up
Drum Motor
6.5mm
DEVELOPMENT
(108 msec)
Drum
Charging
ID Sensor
Grid
10 mm
(167 msec)
Quenching
70 mm
(1.167 sec)
ID Sensor
Bias
6-42
2100 mm 70 mm
10 mm (35 sec) (1.167 sec)
(167 msec)
Main Motor
(Development 70 mm 80 mm
Drive) (1.167 sec) (1.333 sec)
Separation
100 msec
ID Sensor
Pulse Trigger
and PWM 663 mm
(11.050 sec) 10 mm
ID Senor Reading (167 msec)
(for Vsg)
B125D918.WMF
13 February 2004
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
Descriptions
must repair the machine. If the machine cannot be repaired, the technician must
Detailed
put the machine into fixed supply mode with SP 2208 003.
In fixed supply mode, the machine supplies a set quantity of toner per page.
After the technician repairs the machine, the machine must be put back in detect
supply mode with SP 2208 003.
6-43
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
Length Table
If the page becomes longer than 1189 mm (46.8"), the machine changes to the
Length Table for the remaining part of the page.
But, if no toner was supplied before the start of the copy job, the quantity of toner
was sufficient at that time. Because of this, the machine does not change to the
Length Table.
The Length Table ignores the Vsp/Vsg ratio. Toner is supplied at a set rate. This
rate is controlled by the toner supply level set with SP 2208 001.
Length Table
Toner Supply Level (SP 2208 001)
Toner supply rate
L M H HH
2% 4% 8% 15%
Under normal conditions (Vsp/Vsg less than 10%), no toner was supplied during
the first 1189 mm of the print. As a result, the developer does not contain much
toner. Because of this, the Length Table increases the toner supply rate from 0% to
2%, 4%, 8%, or 15%.
6-44
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
Descriptions
Detailed
6-45
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
Image Area
Supply Rates
100%
0.4 sec
60%
0.3 sec
50%
0.4 sec
40%
0.6 sec
30%
0.9 sec
20%
1.6 sec
15%
2.7 sec
10%
3.6sec
0.4 sec
8%
8.8 sec
6%
11.7sec
4%
16.8sec
0.4sec
2%
34.3sec
B125D916.WMF
The percentage values in this chart correspond to the percentages listed in the
Main, Length, and Abnormal ID Sensor Tables. For example, if the value is 10%,
the toner supply clutch is on for 10% of the time; it switches on for 0.4 sec. at 3.6
sec. intervals
6-46
13 February 2004 DEVELOPMENT
Toner End
When Vsp/Vsg is larger than the setting for SP2927 003 (0.225: default) three
pages in a row, the machine prints one more page and then stops immediately.
When toner end occurs, the toner end indicator lights on the operation panel and
copying stops. The machine cannot be used until:
• A new toner cartridge is installed.
• The machine recovers from toner end.
Descriptions
Detailed
cartridge is installed after toner end occurs. After toner end occurs, toner end
recovery starts if you open and close the toner hopper cover.
The machine makes an ID sensor pattern to detect if a supply of toner is available.
If Vsp/Vsg is less than Vref, then the machine detects recovery from toner end, and
goes out from the toner end condition. If Vsp/Vsg is more than Vref 5 times, then
the machine stays in the toner end condition, and it cannot be used. In some
conditions, the machine recovers from toner end if you switch the machine off and
on.
6-47
DEVELOPMENT 13 February 2004
Recovery Start
Toner Cover No
Opened/Closed?
Yes
Recovery Times → ο
B125D917.WMF
6-48
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
1 9
24 10
23 11
12
22
21
13
20
14
19
15
18
17
16
B125D975.WMF
Descriptions
1. Manual Feed Table (Bypass) 13. Feed Rollers (Roll 2)
Detailed
2. Paper Set Sensor (Manual Feed 14. Roll 2 End Sensor (EXP)
Table) 15. Lower Output Tray
3. Registration Rollers 16. Lower Output Stacker
4. Registration Sensor 17. Paper Cassette Paper End Sensor
5. Upper Exit 18. Paper Cassette Feed Roller
6. Upper Exit Rollers
19. Relay Sensor (Cut Sheet)
7. Paper Junction Gate
20. Grip Rollers
8. Rear Exit 21. Roll 1 End Sensor (EXP)
9. Fusing Exit Rollers 22. Feed Rollers (Roll 1)
10. Exit Sensor
23. RF Exit Rollers
11. Roll 1 End Sensor 24. RF Exit Sensor
12. Roll 2 End Sensor
6-49
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
Upper Exit
Rollers
Fusing
Exit
O PC Rollers
Regis. Hot
Drum
Paper Set Sensor Roller Roller
Registration Paper
Manual Pressure Fusing
Sensor Junction Rear
Feed T able Roller Exit G ate Exit
Copier Sensor
Roll
RF Exit Sensor
Feeder
RF Exit Rollers
Cutter
Roll 2 Pre-Feed Position (60 m m below Cutter)
Roll 1 Pre-Feed Position (120 m m below Cutter)
Roll 1
Grip
Relay Sensor
Rollers Roll End Sensor 4 (EXP)
Cassette Feed Roller
Cassette End Sensor
Paper Cassette
B125D919.WMF
This diagram shows all the rollers and sensors used during paper transport. The
diagram is not in scale.
6-50
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
Roll Feeder
The cutter cuts the paper after the machine feeds the specified paper length. The
RF exit sensor monitors paper feed.
The start time of the cutter is controlled by the cutting mode set by the user at the
Descriptions
operation panel:
Detailed
• Preset 1. Cuts a preset SEF length. The size of the original is ignored.
• Preset 2. Cuts a preset LEF length. The size of the original is ignored.
• Synchro. Cuts the copy paper to the same length as the original.
• Variable. Cuts the copy to the length that was input at the operation panel.
After the last cut of a job, the feed roller changes direction and feeds the leading
edge of the paper to its home position. This makes sure that the paper path is not
blocked when paper feed starts for the next job.
Paper Cassette
The optional universal-type paper cassette, installed in the bottom of the roll feeder,
feeds cut sheets.
6-51
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
B125D203.WMF
The user puts a cut sheet [A] on the manual feed table (also known as the bypass
tray).
The paper set sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the sheet. This switches on
the drum motor, main motor, and registration clutch.
The registration clutch engages the registration roller [C] which feeds the sheet.
The registration sensor [D] detects the edge of the sheet and the registration clutch
switches off for 2 seconds. This gives the user time to adjust the position of the
paper to make it straight.
The 2-second interval can be adjusted with SP1911 (By-Pass Feed Start Timing
Adj.).
6-52
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
[D]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[F]
B125D976.WMF
One roll feed motor [A] controls the two feed rollers:
The clutch [B] engages to transfer power from the motor to the feed roller [C] for
Roll 1.
Descriptions
Detailed
-or-
The clutch [D] engages to transfer power from the motor to the feed roller [E] for
Roll 2.
There is a plastic knob [F] at the end of each feed roller. After a new roll is installed,
or after a paper jam is removed, the user turns these knobs to feed the paper
manually to the cutting position.
6-53
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
[C]
B125D952.WMF
Roll 1 Pre-Feeding
• Roll feed clutch 1 engages and turns the Roll 1 feed roller.
• The leading edge of the sheet feeds past the RF exit sensor [A].
• Feed stops.
• The roll feed motor pulls back the leading edge of the sheet until it is 120 mm
below the cutter. Then it stops. This is the pre-feed position [B] for Roll 1.
Roll 2 Pre-Feeding
• The machine pre-feeds the sheet from Roll 2.
• The roll feed motor pulls back the leading edge of the sheet until it is 60 mm
below the cutter and then stops. This is the pre-feed position [C] for Roll 2.
The two sheets stay at their pre-feed positions for the start of the next copy job.
There are no rollers in this part of the paper path. As a result, when the two rolls
are at the pre-feed positions, one can easily feed, and the other does not move.
6-54
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
Procedure
7 9
10
6
13
4
12
5
14
3
11
2
8
1
Descriptions
Detailed
B125D977.WMF
6-55
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
[A]
B125D907.WMF
[B]
[C]
B125D711.WMF
The racks [A] that hold the rolls are adjustable. This lets the user install paper rolls
of different widths.
A roll stopper [B] is put in each end of a roll. The roll lever [C] locks the stoppers in
their position after they are put in the ends of a roll. The roll is put on the rack with
each stopper locked in its position.
6-56
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
[E] [B]
[A]
[D] [C]
B125D978.WMF
Immediately before cutting, the registration roller continues to turn at normal speed,
but the roll feed motor speed increases by a small quantity. This causes the paper
to buckle slightly between the registration roller and the top of the cutter, and this
gives the machine time to cut the paper.
Descriptions
The cutter motor below the drive gear [A] switches on and moves the rotary cutter
Detailed
[B] and its handle across the width of the paper. The switch [C] on the left or right
end detects when to stop the cutter motor. The cutter cuts from left to right, or from
right to left. It does not come back after cutting the paper, until it is time to cut the
next page. In the illustration, the cutter starts a cut from left to right.
The tab [D] on the bottom of the handle releases the spring-loaded paper holder [E].
This holder holds the paper for cutting when the cutter moves across the paper.
The tab opens and locks the paper holder when the cutter gets to the home
position on the other side after cutting. This keeps the paper path open for the next
sheet.
The registration roller continues to turn during cutting.
• This removes the tension between the registration roller and the cutter.
• It also lets paper feed past the drum at the same speed during cutting.
After you install a roll of paper, push the cutter with your hand fully to the left or
right side.
6-57
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
[A] [B]
[E]
B125D980.WMF [D]
[C]
B125D979.WMF
To detect roll end, these two reflective photo-sensors detect the black core of an
empty roll:
• Roll end sensor 1 [A], above Roll 1
• Roll end sensor 2 [B], above Roll 2
Also, two other sensors detect roll end if the core of the paper roll is a color
other than black:
• Roll end sensor 3 (EXP) [C] detects the trailing edge of the roll when roll 1 has
no more paper.
• Roll end sensor 4 (EXP) [D] detects the trailing edge of the roll when roll 2 has
no more paper.
The machine also detects roll end if the RF exit sensor [E] does not detect a
leading edge after paper feed starts.
• If the leading edge of the sheet does not get to the paper exit sensor from Roll 1
in 4.5 seconds or less, the machine detects paper end (or roll not installed).
• If the leading edge of the sheet does not get to the paper exit sensor from Roll 2
in 8.8 seconds or less, the machine detects paper end (or roll not installed).
6-58
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
[A]
[E] [C]
B125D981.WMF
[D] [B]
Support arms [A] on each side of the paper cassette go in grooves on each side
when the paper cassette is set in the roll feeder.
The grooves lift the supports and pull the springs attached to the bottom plate [B] of
the paper cassette. This gives sufficient tension to keep the stack of paper on the
bottom plate at the correct height for paper feed.
The cassette feed motor turns the cassette feed roller [C] to feed paper from the
top of the stack.
A friction pad [D] below the feed roller gives sufficient friction to stop sheets from
double feeding.
The grip rollers [E] (also driven by the cassette feed motor), pull the paper into the
Descriptions
Detailed
paper feed path and feed it up to the RF exit rollers.
6-59
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B125D982.WMF
6-60
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
[B]
[C]
[A]
B125D952.WMF
There are two pre-feed positions for the leading edge of cut sheets after the first
sheet of a multi-page copy job. The length of the paper in the cassette controls the
pre-feed position.
• Pre-feed position 1 [A] is 234 mm below the RF exit sensor [B]. This is for cut
sheets 18.7 inches (457.2 mm) long. (This is the maximum length for the paper
cassette.)
• Pre-feed position 2 [C] is 184.4 mm below the RF exit sensor. This is for cut
sheets less than 18.7 inches long.
Descriptions
Detailed
Position 1 (lower than Position 2) is used for longer paper. This prevents overlap
between the leading edge of a sheet and the trailing edge of the sheet before it.
6-61
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B125D983.WMF
6-62
13 February 2004 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
[B]
[A]
B125D984.WMF
There are four dehumidifiers, two at the front [A] and two at the rear [B], for the roll
feeder.
The dehumidifier switch on the right side of the roll feeder controls the operation of
these dehumidifiers.
Dehumidifier Switch Operation
Descriptions
ON The dehumidifiers stay on unless the fusing lamp is on.
Detailed
When the fusing lamp switches on, the dehumidifiers switch off.
When the fusing lamp switches off, the dehumidifiers switch on
again.
OFF The dehumidifiers always stay off.
6-63
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION 13 February 2004
6.7.11 REGISTRATION
[C]
[B]
[A]
B125D202.WMF
The main motor [A] and registration clutch [B] control the registration roller [C].
The registration clutch switches off temporarily for roll paper or cut sheets from the
paper cassette.
• When paper is fed from the roll feeder or paper cassette, the paper buckles
paper against the roller to remove skew.
• When paper is fed from the manual feed table, feed stops for 2 seconds to let the
user correct the paper position, to prevent skew (☛6.7.2). The 2-second interval
can be adjusted with SP1911 (By-Pass Feed Start Timing Adj.).
Then the registration clutch switches on again to feed the paper to the drum.
6-64
A1 LEF 1-to-2 Copy Job
Units: Sec.
13 February 2004
1.250 0.500
Main Motor
0.500
Fusing Motor 8.275
0.400 3.550
9.900 9.900
0.500 0.500
Exposure
0.333 0.333
Registration CL 1.260
1.260
11.160 11.160
RF Exit Sensor
6-65
Cutter HP (Right)
6.7.12 PAPER FEED TIMING CHART
Cutter HP (Left)
0.800 0.800
Cutter Motor
RF Feed CL 1
0.800 0.400
Cutter Jam Detection 0.800 0.400
Cassette CL
B125D926.WMF
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
Detailed
Descriptions
IMAGE TRANSFER AND SEPARATION 13 February 2004
B125D401.WMF
[A] [B]
6-66
13 February 2004 IMAGE TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
[A]
[B]
B125D205.WMF
The pick-off pawls separate paper from the drum if the separation corona does not
separate the paper fully.
The pick-off pawl solenoid [A] moves the pick-off pawls [B] until they touch the
drum.
When the leading edge of the paper on the drum goes into the separation corona
unit, the solenoid switches on. About 198 mm (7.8") of the paper touches the drum.
The pick-off pawl shaft starts to turn, and the pawls on the shaft are held against
the drum by a spring.
Descriptions
Detailed
6-67
FUSING UNIT 13 February 2004
1 2
3
13
12
4
11
5
6
10
9 B125D601.WMF
7
8
The hot roller wall thickness is 1.3 mm. As a result, warm-up time is short (less
than 120 s + 15 s from 23°C).
6-68
13 February 2004 FUSING UNIT
5
8
2
1 4 B125D601.WMF
Descriptions
• The paper feeds to the transport plate [1].
Detailed
• The 5 sets of spurs [2] at the entrance hold the paper against the transport plate
• The heat and pressure of the hot roller [3] against the pressure roller [4] fuse the
image to the paper.
• The fusing lamp [5] in the center of the hot roller is pre-heated to the correct
temperature. (It switches on and off to keep the rollers at the correct operating
temperature.)
• The hot roller strippers [6] pull the copy off the hot roller.
• The fusing exit sensor [7] detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the sheet,
and checks the timing to detect paper jams.
• The fusing exit rollers [8] feed the paper out of the fusing unit.
6-69
FUSING UNIT 13 February 2004
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[A]
B125D608.WMF
The spring-loaded pressure levers [A] are attached to the pressure roller shaft [B].
The pressure of the springs pushes the pressure roller [C] (a silicone-rubber roller)
against the hot roller [D].
To adjust the position of the pressure spring [E], change the position of the lower
attachment point:
Center; Standard tension (60 N on each spring), standard pressure.
Left; Less tension, less pressure. Set to this position to decrease wrinkling
Right; More tension, more pressure. Can make better fusing with thick paper.
NOTE: Wrinkling occurs more frequently for some types of media (plain,
translucent, film, thick paper).
6-70
13 February 2004 FUSING UNIT
Descriptions
for warm-up.
Detailed
6-71
FUSING UNIT 13 February 2004
6-72
13 February 2004 FUSING UNIT
Descriptions
NOTE: If the paper type is changed for the next copy job, inching control will
Detailed
switch on to apply heat to the pressure roller until it gets to its new target
temperature. The Start key will come on in red (copying disabled) and
then light green after the hot roller and pressure roller get to their new
target temperatures.
6-73
FUSING UNIT 13 February 2004
➄
175 o C PPC Target Tem p.
170 o C PPC Ready Tem p.
145 o C
➅
105 o C
➂ +1 OFF ➆
65 o C
60 o C
➁ -4 ON
Room T emperature
o
10 C
➀
Inching (Fusing Motor On/Off Energy Save Auto O ff
B125D963.WMF
6-74
13 February 2004 FUSING UNIT
Example: If the pressure roller temperature is Y+3°C, then the hot roller
temperature is adjusted to X-2°C.
If the pressure roller suddenly gets very hot (Y+12, for example), inching stops,
and the fusing lamp switches off to try to decrease the temperature.
If SP1104 is not set to “0”, then the machine ignores the pressure roller
temperature and keeps the target hot roller temperature at “X”.
Descriptions
Detailed
SP No. 1107 11 1107 12 1107 13 1107 14 1107 15
6-75
FUSING UNIT 13 February 2004
[A]
[B]
B125D601.WMF
The cleaning roller [A] (parallel to the hot roller) always touches the hot roller [B]
with a low pressure. The cleaning roller has a layer of material that is soaked with
silicone oil.
Each time the fusing motor switches on, it reverses for 2 s to clean the hot roller.
6-76
13 February 2004 FUSING UNIT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B125D602.WMF
Descriptions
Also, interlock switches cut power to the fusing circuit when a cover is opened.
Detailed
6-77
FUSING UNIT 13 February 2004
[H]
[E]
[C]
[G] [D]
[F]
[B] [A]
B125D603.WMF
The fusing motor [A] (a stepper motor) controls the gears and timing belts [B] that
turn the hot roller [C]
The pressure of the hot roller against the pressure roller [D] and cleaning roller [E]
turns these rollers in the opposite direction.
An idle gear [F] turns the gears and timing belts [G]. These gears and belts turn the
fusing exit roller [H] and upper exit rollers [I] in the same direction as the hot roller.
The speed of the fusing motor is controlled by:
• The paper feed source set by the user (manual feed table, roll feeder paper
cassette).
• The type of paper (plain, recycled, translucent, film) set for the paper feed source.
(This is done with the User Tool→ 1 System Setting→ 1 General Features→ 04
Tray Paper Type).
• The width of the paper in the feed source that is used. (The width in each feed
source is set with the User Tool→ 1 System Setting→ 1 General Features→ Tray
Paper Size. The feed source for the job is set at the operation panel.)
6-78
13 February 2004 FUSING UNIT
B125D610.WMF
[A] [B]
Descriptions
the pressure roller to prevent wrinkling. (☛6.9.4)
Detailed
6-79
PAPER EXIT 13 February 2004
8
B125D985.WMF
The fusing exit rollers [5] send the paper to the paper junction gate [3].
Upper Exit
When the paper junction gate [3] is closed:
• The gate sends the paper to the upper exit rollers [2].
• The upper exit rollers feed the paper out of the upper paper exit [1] to a wire
guide on top of the machine. The user can remove this wire guide.
• The wire guide holds the paper against the rear side of the original output tray.
Rear Exit
When the paper junction gate is open:
• The gate sends the paper to the rear paper exit [4].
• The paper moves past mylars attached on the rear of the machine.
• The paper falls into the lower output tray [7] and then stops in the lower output
stacker [8].
Jam Detection
The exit sensor [6] detects paper jams.
6-80
13 February 2004 PAPER EXIT
6 5 1
7
11 9
3
4
10
2 12
8
B125D606.WMF B125D607.WMF
Upper Exit
When the “Upper Copy Output” indicator on the operation panel is ON and the
paper feed exit lever [1] is UP:
• The paper junction gate solenoid [2] stays off.
• The fusing exit rollers [3] send the paper to the paper junction gate [4].
• The closed junction gate sends the paper to the upper exit rollers [5].
• The upper exit rollers feed the paper out of the upper exit [6].
Descriptions
Detailed
Rear Exit
After the user pushes the “Upper Copy Output” key to switch the indicator OFF or
lowers the paper feed exit lever [7]:
• The machine energizes the paper junction gate solenoid [8]. If the user lowers
the lever, the paper exit selection sensor [9] detects this and switches on the
solenoid.
• The paper junction gate solenoid opens the paper junction gate [10].
• The fusing exit rollers [11] send the paper past the paper junction gate to the rear
paper exit [12].
6-81
PAPER EXIT 13 February 2004
6-82
13 February 2004 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
IPU
Ri1001 Ri1001 Ri1001 Fusing Lamp
IMAC-D
(ASIC)
Motors:
SDRAM ! Main
(640 MB) ! Drum
HDD Controller ! Fusing
(Option) Scanner Functions Sensors:
Scanner Motor ! Paper Feed
! Paper Regis.
Original Sensor ! Paper Exit
! Door Open
Registration ! Exit Cover
Sensor
SRAM FROM IC Card CGB P.P.
1 MB 8 MB Slot Original Size
Sensors Fusing Fan
CPU GABIC Fusing Control
(IPU, Printer) (ASIC) Scanner Open ! Thermistors x2
NVRAM Sensor ! Thermostat
256 KB NVRAM
SRAM FROM 64 KB Original Jam Pick-off SOL
4 MB 8 MB Sensor
CPU GABIC Clutches:
CIS Unit ! Toner Supply
(System, Scanner) ASIC
CL
IC Card ! Paper Regist.
OPU
Slot Process Control
! QL
CPU ! Used Toner
(DOM CSS) GATEX SN
! ID SN
MCU (ASIC)
Total Counter
B125D921.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
This is a schematic diagram of the electrical components. For more, refer to the
tables on the next page and the point-to-point diagram for the machine.
6-83
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 13 February 2004
6-84
13 February 2004 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Descriptions
Detailed
PP1 CGB Power Pack High voltage power supply for the charge corona wire
(C), development bias (B), and charge corona grid (G).
PP2 T&S Power Pack High voltage power supply for the transfer corona wire
(T) and the separation corona wire (S) in the T&S
(Transfer and Separation) unit.
QL
QL1 Quenching Lamp (Left) This removes remaining electrical charge on the left part
of the drum immediately after cleaning.
QL2 Quenching Lamp (Center) This removes remaining electrical charge on the center
part of the drum immediately after cleaning.
QL3 Quenching Lamp (Right) This removes remaining electrical charge on the right
part of the drum immediately after cleaning
6-85
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 13 February 2004
Sensors
S1 Cassette End Sensor This sensor is above the paper cassette. It detects
paper end after the last sheet feeds.
S2 Cassette Set Sensor This detects when the cassette is set and locked in its
place.
S3 Exit Cover Sensor This detects if the exit cover on the rear of the machine
is open or closed.
S4 Fusing Exit Sensor This sensor is in front of the fusing exit rollers. It
switches on when the leading edge of the copy leaves
the fusing unit.
S5 ID Sensor The machine uses this sensor to control toner supply,
toner near-end, and toner end. There is no toner density
sensor in this machine.
S6 Original Exit Sensor This detects the original when it feeds out of the
scanner.
S7 Original Registration Sensor (1) Detects the leading edge of the original and stops
the original feed roller. The user can then manually
make the original straight. (2) Detects the trailing edge
of the original, or detects a jam if it does not detect the
trailing edge.
S8 Original Set Sensor (A4/A) Detects the leading edge of the original. This starts the
scanner motor. This sensor also detects A4 or LTR
width paper.
S9 Original Width Sensor (A0/E) Detects A0-width paper.
S10 Original Width Sensor (A1/D) Detects A1-width paper.
S11 Original Width Sensor (A2/C) Detects A2-width paper.
S12 Original Width Sensor (A3/B) Detects A3-width paper.
S13 Original Width Sensor: Detects 30-inch-width paper (North America) or 914 mm
NA: 30"/EU: 914 mm wide paper (Europe). This sensor is included in export
models only. It is the second sensor from the right side
of the manual feed table.
S14 Paper Exit Selection Sensor This detects the position of the paper exit selection lever
on the top rear edge of the machine. (☛ 6.10.2). This
sensor is a part of the SIB board.
S15 Paper Registration Sensor This detects paper at the registration rollers.
S16 Paper Set Sensor This detects when a cut sheet is placed on the manual
feed table (by-pass).
S17 Relay Sensor This sensor is near the grip rollers. It: (1) Detects the
leading edge of every cut sheet, switches off the
cassette paper feed clutch, and switches on the grip
rollers (☛ 6.7.8), (2) Detects paper jams where the
paper feeds out of the paper cassette.
S18 RF Exit Sensor (1) Detects the leading edge of the paper from the rolls.
(2) Detects the trailing edge of cut sheets from the paper
cassette and trailing edges of sheets cut from the paper
rolls for paper feed timing and jam detection.
(3) If this sensor does not detect a leading edge after
feeding from Roll 1 or Roll 2, it also signals paper end
for the roll.
S19 RF Set Sensor This detects if the spring-loaded lock lever of the roll
feeder drawer is locked.
S20 Roll End Sensor 1 This reflective photosensor above Roll 1 detects the
core of the roll (which is black), after there is no more
paper on Roll 1.
S21 Roll End Sensor 2 This reflective photosensor above Roll 2 detects the
core of the roll (which is black), after there is no more
paper on Roll 2.
6-86
13 February 2004 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
S22 Roll End Sensor 3 (EXP) This detects the trailing edge of the roll after there is no
more paper on Roll 1. This sensor is included because if
the color of the roll core is not black, Roll End Sensor 1
cannot always detect roll end. It is only included in
export models.
S23 Roll End Sensor 4 (EXP) This detects the trailing edge of the roll after there is no
more paper on Roll 2. This sensor is included because if
the color of the roll core is not black, Roll End Sensor 2
cannot always detect roll end. It is only included in
export models.
S24 Toner Overflow Sensor Detects toner overflow in the used toner collection
bottle.
S25 Upper Unit Sensor Detects when the upper unit is open.
S26 Wire Cleaner Sensor The actuator of this sensor is attached to the wire that
moves the transfer cleaner from left to right. This tells
the machine when the wire cleaner moves. This sensor
is a part of the SIB board.
Solenoids
SOL1 Paper Junction Gate Solenoid This controls the paper junction gate in front of the rear
paper exit and below the upper exit. When closed, paper
feeds out at the top. When open, paper feeds out at the
back.
SOL2 Pick-Off Pawl Solenoid This moves the pick-off pawls until they touch the drum.
Switches
SW1 Dehumidifier Switch Switches the dehumidifiers (x4) in the roll feeder on/off.
SW2 Exit Cover Switch This detects if the exit cover on the rear of the machine
is closed.
SW3 Main Power Switch This switches the copier on and off.
SW4 Scanner Stop Switch This is on the operation panel. The user pushes this to
stop original feed if there is a problem during scanning.
SW5 Scanner Switch This interlock switch stops power to the original feed unit
when the original feed unit cover is lifted.
SW6 Toner Hopper Cover Switch This detects if the toner supply cover is open or closed.
SW7 Upper Unit Switch 1 This detects if the upper unit is open on the left side.
SW8 Upper Unit Switch 2 This detects if the upper unit is open on the right side.
SW9 Left Cutter HP Switch This detects if the cutter in the roller feeder is at the
Descriptions
home position at the left side. In this condition, the paper
Detailed
holder of the cutter is locked open (the paper feed path
is open).
SW10 Right Cutter HP Switch This detects if the cutter in the roller feeder is at the
home position at the right side. In this condition, the
paper holder of the cutter is locked open (the paper feed
path is open).
6-87
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 13 February 2004
6-88
13 February 2004 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
IPU
MCU
B125D801.WMF
Descriptions
fusing unit, RSS, etc.)
Detailed
• Scanner (sensors, motors, etc.)
The MCU contains two large blocks, connected by a UART: SCU and ECU.
• SCU. (System & Scanner Control Unit). Does overall system and scanner
control.
• ECU. (Engine Control Unit). Does print engine and image processing control.
NOTE: The MCU DIP switches must always be OFF (default) and they must not
be changed in the field.
6-89
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 13 February 2004
6.11.4 PSU
B125D802.WMF
The PSU (Power Supply Unit) supplies dc for all electrical components in the
machine, and controls ac input to the fusing lamps and anti-condensation lamps.
6-90
13 February 2004 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Cooling Fan
Scanner Stop SW
Operation Panel
Scanner Motor
CIS 1 CIS 1
LPH 2
Regis. Clutch
LPH 1 LPH 3
Main SW
B125D923.WMF
Descriptions
SIB (Scanner Interface Board)
Detailed
The SIB controls the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) and changes analog data to
digital data (A/D) for scanned images.
6-91
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 13 February 2004
RFDB
SFDB
B125D924.WMF
The RFDB and SFDB are on the bottom plate of the drawer in the optional roll
sheet feeder.
6-92
13 February 2004 SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. COPIER ENGINE
Configuration: Desktop
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Originals: Sheet
Original Image Size: Maximum: 914 x 3,600 mm (36" x 142")
(W x L) Minimum: 182 x 140 mm (7" x 5")
Max Original Width: 960 mm (37.7")
Original Weight 18 ~ 135 g/m²
35 µm ~ 1.0 mm
Copy Paper Size: Maximum:
(W x L) Manual feed: 914 x 2,000 mm (36" x 78")
Roll Feed: 914 x 3,600 mm (36" x 142")
Paper Cassette: 297 x 420mm (12" x 18")
Minimum:
Manual Feed: 210 x 257 mm (81/2" x 10")
Roll Feed: 210 x 280 mm (81/2" x 11")
Paper Cassette: 210 x 297 mm (81/2" x 11")
Copy Paper Weight 52.3 ~ 110 g/m² (13.9 ~ 29.3 lb.)
68 ~ 148 µm (Plain paper, Translucent)
3 ~ 4 MIL (Film)
Copying Speed: 2 cpm (A0/E SEF)
(cpm: copies / 4 cpm (A1/D LEF)
minute)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Reduction/Enlargement:
Inch Version
Metric Version
Engineering Arch.
Spec.
Spec-1
SPECIFICATIONS 13 February 2004
Printing: 2 levels
Warm-up Time: Less than 2 minutes
(Room temperature 23°C, 120 V: US, 220-240 V: EU)
First Copy Time: 1st Roll Feed: 22 sec. (A1/LEF/D LEF)
Manual Feed: 32 sec. (A1/LEF/D LEF)
Copy Number Input: Ten-key pad, 1 to 20 (standard sizes only)
Copy Paper Bypass Feed: 1 sheet
Capacity: Roll Feed: Max. Diameter: 175 mm (6.9")
Max. Length: 150 m (16.4 yds)
Roll Core Diameter: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm
(about 3")
Paper Cassette: 250 sheets
Output Tray Upper Output Stocker
Capacity: Plain paper: 25 sheets
Translucent: 10 sheets
Roll Feeder or Table
Plain paper: 20 sheets (A1/D or A0/E)
Translucent: 1 sheet
Memory Capacity: RAM: 80 MB
HDD: More than 10 GB (option)
Toner Cartridge exchange (800 g/cartridge)
Replenishment:
Toner Yield: 2,200 copies
(A1 LEF, 6% full black, 1 to 20 copying, Text mode)
Power Source: North America: 120 V, 60 Hz, 15 A or more
Europe/Asia: 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 10 A or more
Spec-2
13 February 2004 SPECIFICATIONS
*¹ Full System:
Mainframe with Roll Feeder (2 roll), Paper Cassette,
HDD, Stamp Board and Interface PCB
*² Ready:
The dehumidifiers are switched off.
Noise Emission: The measurements were made in accordance
with ISO 7779 at the operator position
Sound Power Level
Full System
Stand-by 43.0 dB (A)
Copying 68.0 dB (A)
Copying (from memory) 68.0 dB (A)
Spec-3
SPECIFICATIONS 13 February 2004
Spec-4
13 February 2004 SPECIFICATIONS
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
9 1 2 3
6
5
B125V905.WMF
Spec-5
A B C D E F G H I
PSU FUSE TABLE
Symbol
CP101 DOM/NA 15A 125/250VAC
Fusing Unit Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 3 CN204-B14
CN220-A1 CN501-A17 to
[0] GND to -A2 -A16 CN502-A1
L1 +5V [5] 1
CN520
+5V [5]
CN825
CN825
8A 250VAC -A2 2
EU/AA/CHN Thermostat1: 200°C
Fusing Lamp: 1150W
Thermostat 2: 199°C TH2 N.C. 2 2
N.C.
-B15 N.C. Roll End 1 [t5]
-A3 3 S20 Roll End Sensor 1
FU001 DOM/NA 15A 125VAC 3 1 -B16 -A3 to -A4 -A15 to -A14 C.GND [0]
TH [5] Pressure Roller Thermistor GND [0]
EU/AA/CHN T6, 3AH 250VAC
1 2 CN208-B17 -A5 to -A10 -A13 to -A8 FU501 +5V [5] -B15 1
CN551
FU002 ALL T2A 250VAC TS1 TS2 [0]GND +24V(3) [24] Roll End 2 [t5] -B14 2 S21 Roll End Sensor 2
CN824
CN824
3
FU101 DOM/NA T10AH 250VAC TH1 T2A 250VAC C.GND [0] -B13
2 1 -B18 -A11 to -A16 -A7 to -A2
EU/AA/CHN T6, 3AH 250VAC TH [5] Hot Roller Thermistor GND [0]
FU301 ALL T6, 3AL 250VAC Hot Roller Thermistor +5V [5] -A4 2 2 1 1
CN528
CN530
CN530
CN114 CN115 RF Exit [s5] -A5 3 3 2 2 S18 RF Exit Sensor
FU302 ALL T6, 3AL 250VAC CN114 CN115 -A6 4 4 3 3
6
C.GND [0]
6 1 CN603-6 [5] +5V
CN620
FU303 ALL T6, 3AL 250VAC
OPTION Cassette End Sensor S1 2
3
-5
-4
[t5] Cassette End
[0] C.GND
SFDB -B12 20 20 1
CN103-1
CN522
+5V [5]
4 1 -3
(PCB 6) CN601-B8 CN221-A1 Roll End 1 [t5]
-A17 -A1 RF Set [s5] -B11
-B10
19
18
19
18
2
3
S19 RF Set Sensor
H5 SW1 [5] +5V 1 7 -B1 -B17
CN621
[5] +5V C.GND [0]
CN103-2
CN101-2
CN101-1
CN102-1 2 1 2 -2 Roll End 2 [t5]
Relay Sensor S17 -A2
CN131 CN130
CN131 CN130
[t5] Relay -B7 2 6 [5] +5V -B2 -B16
1 2 2 Dehumidifier Dehumidifier 3 -1 [0] C.GND -B6 3 5 -A3 RF Exit [s5]
-2 [0] GND -B3 -B15
CN131
CN605
CN605
1 1 1 1 FU601 -B5 4 -A4 RF Set [s5] +5V [5] -A7 5 5 3 1 3
CN531
4
CN529
CN529
Anti-Condensation Heater -B4 -B14
CN138
RFDB (OPTION)
[0] GND
CN138
CN140
CN140
2 1 1 H1 H4 1 -9 -B4 5 3 -A5 Roll End 3 [t5]
-B5 -B13
Roll End 3 [t5] -A8 6 6 2 2 2 S22 Roll End Sensor 3
CN622
2 2 2 2 [5] +5V [24] 24V(3) Roll End 4 [t5] C.GND [0] -A9 7 7 1 3 1
1 2 Cassette Set Sensor 2 -8 -B3 6 2 -A6
AC IN Dehumidifier Dehumidifier S2 3 -7
[t5] Cassette Set
T1A 250VAC [24] 24V(3) Right Cutter H.P. [t5]
-B6 -B12
GND PSU H5 3 1 1 1 1
[0] C.GND -B2 7 1 -A7 [0] GND Left Cutter H.P. [t5]
-B7 -B11
CN139
CN139
CN141
CN141
-B8 -B10 -B9 21 21 3 1 3
N L H2 H3 Roll Feed CL 1 [t24]
CN553
CN553
+5V [5]
CN554
2 2 1 2 -10
(PCB 4) 2 2 [24] +24V (3) Roll Feed CL 2 [t24]
-B9 -B9 Roll End 4 [t5]
-B8 22 22 2 2 2 S23 Roll End Sensor 4
CN623
CN623
Dehumidifier Switch -B1 1 9 -A8 -B7 23 23 1 3 1
Cassette Feed Clutch MC1 2 1 -11 -A8 2 8 -B1
[0] GND GND [0]
-B10
-B11
N.C. N.C. -B8 C.GND [0]
CN150-4 [t24] Cassette [t5] Cassette Set RESET [t5] -B7
CN160-2 -A7 3 7 -B2 -B12 -B6
(PCB 5)
POWER Feed Clutch [t5] Relay ENABLE [s5] Left Cutter
1 6 CN602-1 -A6 4 6 -B3
CN606
CN606
RY001 -A10 8 2 1
CN523
-B13 -B5 8
CN523
CORD 1 [st24] A [t5] Cassette End
D302
MODE [st5] H.P [t5]
001
2: P.GND Left Cutter H.P. Switch
CN915
RY
2 5 -2 [24] 24V (3) -A5 5 5 -B4 -B14 -B4 -A11 9 9 1 2
[t24] Cassette Feed Clutch CLOCK [5] C.GND [0]
CN624
CN624
D301 2 3 4 -3 [st24] AB -A4 6 4 -B5
CN150-8 1: +24V -B15 -B3
CN160-1
Cassette Feed Motor M1 4 3 -4 [st24] B -A3 7 3 -B6
[s5] ENABLE CWB[st5]
-B16 -B2 SW9
-5 [t5] RESET
RY002
5 2 [24] 24V (3) -A2 Cutter Motor Left (+) [s5]
6 1 -6 8 2 -B7 -B17 -B1
[st24] BB [5] CLOCK Cutter Motor Right (-) [s5] Right Cutter -B6 24 24 2 1
CN524
-A1
CN524
9 1 -B8 Right Cutter H.P. Switch
CN550
CN550
[5] MODE H.P. [t5]
Quenching Lamp
Exit Cover Sensor
11
Quenching Lamp
1
Quenching Lamp
-6 -A13 2
CN525
Wire Cleaner Motor
CN525
-1
ID Sensor
Clutch 1 [t24]
Noise Filter
(Center)
Bottle Motor
-5
Used Toner
V102
(Right)
(Left)
PE -B3 27 27 2 1
CN303-2
24V (3) [24]
CN552
CN552
T002
Roll Feed -B4 26
MC4 Roll Feed Clutch 2
26 1 2
A101
QL1
QL2
QL3
S16
S24
S15
S5
ON/OFF
V101
S3
S4
S26
CN303-3
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
CN300-2
SW3 MC5 SOL2 M10 M11 16 7 1
YCB
YCA
VAA
SW2
24V [24]
Fusing Motor
4 32 6 2
Drum Motor
CN100-1 -1 32
Main Motor
24V [24] 5 3
CN303-1
CN307 CN308 CN305 CN306 CN345 -6 31 N.C. N.C.
31 4 4
M8
CN526
Roll Feed Motor
CN526
FAN A [ts24] -5 15
SW7
2 -2 15 3 5
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
A [ts24] -4 30 6
30 2
5
CN110
B [ts24] -3 14
5 1 -4 DDC2 ON/OFF RY
PSU Cooling
Fan Motor B [ts24] 14 1 7
CN301-2 CN301-1
002
C.GND
C.GND
CN502-B2 28 28
V1
FU101
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
6
5
4
Cutter Directioin Left [s24]
CN527
CN527
VCCE
1
2
3
3 -3
M3 Cutter Motor
VCC
CN304 CN802 CN804 CN845 CN808 CN809 CN810 CN813 CN814 M5 M4 M6 Cutter Directioin Right [s24]
-B1 29 29
D63 CN304 CN802 CN804 CN845 CN808 CN809 CN810 CN813 CN814
Main Power Switch
CN302-2
1 1
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
Toner Hopper Cover Switch
1
2
3
2
1
Upper Unit Switch 2
FU302
SW6
-3 CN309 CN310 CN311 CN312 Key Counter
1
2
3
(RDS)
(RDS)
(RDS)
+24F (3)
10
10
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
CSS3
CSS2
CSS1
CN812 CN815 CN816 CN817
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SW8
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
-12 P.GND
-13 P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
CN302-1
+5VE
+5VE
CN816
+5VE
-12V
-12V
CN300-1
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
3
2
1
4
2
2
1
CN152-14
-10
CN252-10
-1
-4
-3
-2
-7
CN152-11
-4
CN153-6
-5
-4
-3
-7
-8
-1
-2
-3
CN152-9
CN161-2
-2
-1
CN151-9
-4
-5
-1
-5
-3
-8
-6
CN151-6
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
to SIB
CN238-A1 to A8
to IPU to I/F Board to HDD
-B16
-B15
-B14
-B13
-B12
-B11
-B10
-B9
-B8
-B7
1
2
3
4
CN202-10
-11
CN208-A15
-A14
-A13
-A12
-A11
-A10
-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
CN204-A10
CN209-B8
-B7
-B6
(Option)
-A11
(Option)
CN202-9
CN207-12
-11
-10
CN211-12
-11
-10
CN209-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
CN203-4
-6
-7
-8
-3
-2
-1
-5
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
CN208-A1
CN207-14
-13
CN207-1
-2
-3
CN210-6
-7
CN211-6
-5
-4
-3
CN211-1
-2
CN211-9
-8
-7
-3
-4
-6
-5
CN243-1
-2
-3
-4
CN242-1
-2
-3
-4
-8
-7
CN207-4
-5
-7
-8
-9
-1
CN202-2
CN201-6
-4
-2
-5
-1
-3
CN239-1
-2
-3
-4
CN240-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-6
-A9
-A10
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-B10
[t24]
Toner Supply Clutch
QL1 [t24]
QL2 [t24]
QL3[t24]
+12V [12]
ID Sensor LED [t12]
ID Sensor [12]
GND [0]
TXD1 [5]
GND [0]
RXD1[5]
+5VE [5]
GND [0]
KEYCNT_SET [t5]
+24V (3) [24]
KEY_CNT [t24]
-12V [12]
Pick-off
Pawl Solenoid
[t24]
+5VE [5]
[s24]
STRAT/STOP [t5]
+24V(2) INT [24]
+24V(2) INT [24]
GND [0]
GND [0]
LOK [t5]
CW/CCW [s5]
CLOCK [5]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
Toner Hopper Cover
+5V [5]
GND [0]
+12V [12]
+5V [5]
Paper Set [t5]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
Motor [t5]
GND [0]
Motor- [s12]
Motor+ [s12]
LDK [t5]
CLOCK [5]
CW/CCW [s5]
TRG [t5]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
TS
+12V
TS_FB
GND [0]
Wire Cleaner
Wire Cleaner
GND [0]
TXD1 [5]
RXD1 [5]
GND [0]
STRAT/STOP [t5]
GND [0]
TXD1 [5]
RXD1 [5]
GND [0]
+24V(2) INT [24]
+24V(2) INT [24]
GND [0]
GND [0]
LOK [t5]
CW/CCW [s5]
CLOCK [5]
+5V [5]
GND [0]
+5VE [5]
+5VE [5]
TXD_MK1
RXD_MK1
GND [0]
GND [0]
KYCD_SET [t5]
Upper Unit [s24]
+5V [5]
3 CN323-3
2 CN323-2
SMDB
PTC (FU100)
PTC (FU101)
(PCB 8)
33V 1.5A
4
[s24] +24V Scanner Open
2
4
CN700-1 -4
-2 [s24] +24V (3)
-3 [0] GND
T2A 250Vac -3 -2
-4 [5] +5V
-1 [0] GND
CN701-6 CN208-B1
[5 ® 0/5] BB
[5 ® 0/5] AB
-5 -B2
[s5] Original Width [A1/D]
[5] M2
Registration Clutch
[t24] TRG (GND)
-1 -B6
[5] RDSYNC
[24] +24V (3)
[t5] G Drive
[s5] SWXRI
[t5] C Drive
[t24] Paper
[t5] B Drive
[t5] T Drive
+24V(2) INT
[5] OPDAT0
[5] C Detect
[5] POWER
[5] B Detect
GND (N.C.)
[5] SSCAN
[t5] BEEP
[5] T Detect
[5] OPDATI
CN702-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
[5] SLEAD
[5] OPSCK
[5] SGATE
[5] SOUT
[5] LEDC
[5] SCLK
[5] +5 VE
[5] +5 VE
[s12/24]
[5] SGLK
[t5] CS
[5] SODx
[5] +5VE
[5] +5VE
[5] +5VE
[5] +5VE
[5] MAIN
[5] +5VE
[5] +5VE
[5] +5VE
[5] +5VE
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[0] GND
[5] SIDx
[5] +5V
[5] SIN
[5] +5V
[12/24]
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
C224
-5 N.C. N.C.
CN224 Signal Name CN254 CN224 Signal Name CN224 CN224 Signal Name CN254
-A9
-A8
-A7
CN208-B20
-B19
CN204-A12
-A13
-A14
-B15
CN204-B11
-B10
-B9
-B8
-B7
CN208-A20
-A19
-A18
-A17
-A16
CN209-B4
-B5
CN209-B3
-B2
-B1
CN205-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-B6
-B5
-B4
CN206-B12
-B11
-B10
-A6
-A5
-A4
CN204-B12
-B13
-A3
-A2
-A1
-B3
-B2
-B1
CN213-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
CN214-1
-2
-A12
-A11
-A10
-1 SCANMCLKKSV -1 -45 DB(13) -45 -89 A(6) -89
CN204-B9
-B8
-B7
-B6
-B5
-B4
-B3
-B2
-B1
CN204-A9
-A8
-A7
-A6
-A5
-A4
-A3
-A2
-A1
CN212-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
N.C.
N.C.
CN823 -8 XRSTAMDP -8 -52 GND -52 -96 GND -96
-9 N.C. -9 -53 ED(1) -53 -97 A(2) -97
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-10 PRNOFF -10 -54 GND -54 -98 A(1) -98
10
11
12
11
12
13
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
N.C.
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN325 CN326
2
1
1
CN818 CN801 CN819 CN340 CN820 CN821 CN882 CN880 CN881 -13 XINJISET -13 -57 ED(3) -57
CN818 CN801 CN819 CN340 CN820 CN821 CN882 CN880 CN881 -14 XDCT -14 -58 GND -58
4
3
2
1
11
12
10
-60
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
1
3
2
1
2
2
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
10
M9
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PP2
PP1
-19 TXDHDD -19 -63 ED(6) -63
CN322-1
-2
CN830 -20 TXDSCANC -20 -64 GND -64 from PSU
CN314-1
-2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
-23 -67
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S14
S10
S12
S11
S8
S6
S7
T
S9
C
-28 XERDIPU -28 -72 GND -72 from PSU
(PCB 3) -29
-30
XCSIPU
XCSINJI
-29
-30
-73
-74
N.C.
GND
-73
-74
Recycle Counter
Paper Junction
Cooling Fan Motor
Gate Solenoid
-31 N.C. -31 -75 N.C. -75
-32 XCSIMAC1 GND
Original Width Sensor A0/E
Paper Exit
Selection Sensor
Original Exit Sensor
N.C.
N.C.
-36 GND -36 -80 GND -80
-37 DB(9) -37 -81 A(10) -81
-38 GND -38 -82 GND -82
-39 DB(10) -39 -83 A(9) -83
CN460-A1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B9
-40 GND -40 -84 GND -84
CN401-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN450-1
-2
-3
-5
CN250-1
-3
-41 DB(11) -41 -85 A(8) -85
CN400-2
-6
-7
-1
-4
-5
VDB
RESET
SGATE_N
SIDX
C.GND
SGLK
SWXRI
SIDX
XRDSYNC
XSLEAD
XSSCAN
N.C.
XLEDC
XCS
SIN
SOUT
SCLK
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
N.C.
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
C.GND
+5VE
C.GND
(PCB 9)
PTC(FU1)
FU103 T6, 3A 125VAC CN403-A1 CN257-B7 C.GND
C.GND
C.GND -B7 -A1 C.GND CN251-B8 CN146-A1
-A2 -B6 RXIN0- TXOUT0-
C.GND
FU102 T6, 3A 125VAC
C.GND
C.GND -B6 -A2 C.GND IPU RXIN0+ -A1
-B7
-B8
-A2
TXOUT0+
C.GND -A3 -B5 C.GND
C.GND
C.GND -A2 -B7
C.GND
SIB
C.GND -B5
-A5
-A3
-B3
C.GND (PCB 1) RXIN1- -B6 -A3
C.GND
TXOUT1-
FU101 T6, 3A 125VAC RXINO_NVDB
RXINO_PVDB -B3
-A6
-A5
TXOUTO_N
TXOUTO_P
RXIN1+
RXIN2-
-A3
-B4
-B6
-A5
TXOUT1+
TXOUT2-
(PCB 7)
C.GND -B2 C.GND -A5 -B4
-B2 -A6 RXIN2+ TXOUT2+
C.GND C.GND RXCLKIN- -B2 -A7
-A7 -B1 TXCLKOUT_N TXCLKOUT-
RXCLK_N RXCLKIN+ -A7 -B2 TXCLKOUT+
RXCLK_P -B1 -A7 TXCLKOUT_P -B1 -A8
C.GND C.GND
-B8 -B1
C.GND (LOGIC)
C.GND (LOGIC)
C.GND C.GND
C.GND(LOGIC)
C.GND (LED)
C.GND (LED)
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GDN
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC_GND
LOGIC GND.
LOGIC GND.
LOGIC GND.
C.GND(LED)
TEMPOOUT
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
LOGIC GND
EVEN_DRV
EVEN_DRV
EVEN_DRV
TEMPOUT
ODD_DRV
TEMPOUT
ODD_DRV
ODD_DRV
2
CLOCK-N
CLOCK-N
CLOCK-N
CLOCK-P
VDD: +5V
VDD: +5V
CLOCK-P
CLOCK-P
VDD: +5V
VDD: +5V
VDD: +5V
VDD: +5V
LEDCA
2
LEDCA
LEDCA
fLEDG
LEDCA
fLEDG
fLEDG
LEDCA
fLEDR
fLEDR
fLEDR
fLEDG
fLEDB
fLEDB
fLEDG
fLEDB
fLEDR
fLEDR
fLEDB
fLEDB
HSYNC
HSYNC
HSYNC
fVOD
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VOD
VOD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VOD
LOAD
VOD
LOAD
LOAD
OS1
OS2
OS1
OS2
STRB
OS1
OS2
STRB
STRB
OS1
OS2
fRS
fRS
fRS
OS1
OS2
fTR
fTR
fTR
fRS
fRS
fTR
fTR
SCK
fM
fM
SCK
SCK
fM
fM
fM
+5V
+5V
+5V
CN260 CN263
SI
CN262
SI
SI
CN264
CN260 Signal Name CN260 CN262 Signal Name CN850 CN264 Signal Name CN1021 CN264 Signal Name CN264 CN264 Signal Name CN264
CN414-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN415-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN405-1
-2
-3
CN412-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN413-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN262
CN473-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN405-4
-5
-6
CN472-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN471-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN405-7
-8
-9
CN410-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN411-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
CN474-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
CN475-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-1 M2P3(2) -1 -1 -1 -1 XPJFGATE -1 -1 XARCLK -1 -24 GND -24 -47 RXDSCANC -47
GND
-2 GND -2 -2 XPJLGATE -2 -2 XARKD(15) -2 -25 GND -25 -48 XAWFGATE -48
-2 DB(8) -2
-3 M1DTH(7) -3 -3 XARKD(14) -3 -26 GND -26 -49 XAWLSYNC -49
-3 DB(9) -3 -3 XPJLSYNC -3
-4 M1DTH(8) -4 -4 XARKD(13) -4 -27 GND -27 -50 XAWLGATE -50
-5 M1DTH(6) -5 -4 DB(10) -4 -4 GND -4
-5 XARKD(12) -5 -28 GND -28 -51 XAWKD(15) -51
-6 M1DTH(9) -6 -5 DB(11) -5 -5 PJCLK -5 -6 XARKD(11) -6 -29 GND -52 XAWKD(14) -52
-29
-7 M1DTH(5) -7 -6 DB(12) -6 -6 GND -6 -7 XARKD(10) -7 -30 GND -30 -53 XAWKD(13) -53
-8 M1DTH(10) -8 -7 DB(13) -7 -7 XPJD(0) -7 -8 XARKD(9) -8 -31 GND -31 -54 XAWKD(12) -54
-9 M1DTH(4) -9 -8 XPJD(1) -8 -9 XARKD(8) -9 -32 GND -32 -55 XAWKD(11) -55
-8 DB(14) -8
-10 M1DTH(11) -10 -9 -10 XARLGATE -10 -33 GND -56 XAWKD(10) -56
-9 DB(15) -9 XPJD(2) -9 -33
-11 M1DTH(3) -11
-10 GND -10 -10 XPJD(3) -10 -11 XARLSYNC -11 -34 GND -34 -57 XAWKD(9) -57
-12 M1DTH(12) -12
-12 XARFGATE -12 -35 GND -35 -58 XAWKD(8) -58
CN440-1
-2
-3
CN442-1
-2
-3
M1DTH(13) -14 -12 XPJD(5) -12 -13 XWRSYNC -13 -36 GND -36 -59 XAWKD(7) -59
-14 -12 XEWRROM -12
-15 M1DTH(1) -15 -13 -14 XFWRSYNC -14 -37 GND -37 -60 XAWKD(6) -60
-13 XERDROM -13 XPJD(6) -13
-16 M1DTH(14) -16 -15 TXDPRNC -15 -38 GND -38 -61 XAWKD(5) -61
-14 XRSTIPU -14 -14 XPJD(7) -14
-17 M1DTH(0) -17 -16 RXDPRNC -16 -39 GND -39 -62 XAWKD(4) -62
-15 INJIRXW -15 -15 GND -15 -17 GND -17 -40 GND -40 -63 XAWKD(3) -63
-18 M1DTH(15) -18
-19 -16 GND -16 -16 +5VE(1) -16 -18 GND -18 -41 GND -41 -64 XAWKD(2) -64
-19 GND
-20 GND -20 -17 A(0) -17 -17 +5VE(1) -17 -19 GND -19 -42 GND -42 -65 XAWKD(1) -65
1
-39 PULL UP -39
POINT TO POINT
Signal Direction -40 GND -40
t Active Low
PTC (FU1)
CN994
6.0v 1.1A
CN902-1
A B C D E F G H I
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (B125)
2 22 23 24
1 3 Index Index
Symbol Description P to P Symbol Description P to P
21 No. No.
4 CIS Sensors
15 20 CIS1 2 CIS 1 (Contact Image Sensor) G1 S1 81 Cassette End Sensor E6
CIS2 2 CIS 2 (Contact Image Sensor) H1 S2 79 Cassette Set Sensor E6
CIS3 2 CIS 3 (Contact Image Sensor) H1 S3 22 Exit Cover Sensor D5
19
25 CIS4 2 CIS 4 (Contact Image Sensor) H1 S4 42 Fusing Exit Sensor E5
18 CIS5 2 CIS 5 (Contact Image Sensor) I1 S5 39 ID Sensor E5
17 26
Lamp S6 3 Original Exit Sensor D3
L1 43 Fusing Lamp B6 S7 12 Original Registration Sensor D3
16 LPH S8 13 Original Set Sensor (A4/A) D3
14 LPH1 24 LPH1 (LED Print Head 1) A1 S9 7(NA)/ Original Width Sensor (A0/E) C3
37 LPH2 24 LPH2 (LED Print Head 2) B2 8(EU)
13 5
36 LPH3 24 LPH3 (LED Print Head 3) B2 S10 9 Original Width Sensor (A1/D) C3
12 35 Magnetic Clutches S11 10 Original Width Sensor (A2/C) C3
11 6 34 S12 11 Original Width Sensor (A3/B) C3
10 33 MC1 78 Cassette Feed Clutch E6
9 32 MC2 18 Paper Registration Clutch D3 S13 8(NA)/ Original Width Sensor D3
8 27
7 31 MC3 74 Roll Feed Clutch 1 I5 7(EU) (NA:30”/EU:914mm)
30 29 28 S14 4 Paper Exit Selection Sensor E3
MC4 75 Roll Feed Clutch 2 I5
MC5 38 Toner Supply Clutch D5 S15 31 Paper Registration Sensor D5
Motors S16 32 Paper Set Sensor D5
M1 77 Cassette Feed Motor E6 S17 80 Relay Sensor E6
S18 69 RF Exit Sensor I6
M2 48 Cooling Fan Motor D3
S19 71 RF Set Sensor I6
M3 73 Cutter Motor I5
40 41 S20 60 Roll End Sensor 1 I6
M4 20 Drum Motor F5
39 42 M5 36 Fusing Motor F5
S21 61 Roll End Sensor 2 I6
S22 68 Roll End Sensor 3 (EXP) I6
47 M6 37 Main Motor F5
43 M7 50 PCB Cooling Fan Motor B3
S23 67 Roll End Sensor 4 (EXP) I6
48 M8 70 Roll Feed Motor I5
S24 27 Toner Overflow Sensor D5
38 S25 17 Upper Unit Sensor D3
49 M9 21 Scanner Motor A3
S26 14 Wire Cleaner Motor Sensor E5
M10 29 Used Toner Bottle Motor F5
47 M11 6 Wire Cleaner Motor F5
Solenoids
SOL1 5 Paper Junction Gate Solenoid E3
PCBs
SOL2 40 Pick-Off Pawl Solenoid E5
44 PCB1 54 IPU (Image Processing Unit) E2
Switches
PCB2 55 MCU (Main Control Unit) G4
SW1 63 Dehumidifier Switch C6
50 PCB3 23 Operation Panel C3
45 PCB4 57 PSU (Power Supply Unit) A6
SW2 26 Exit Cover Switch C5
SW3 16 Main Power Switch A5
PCB5 58 RFDB (Roll Feed Drive Board) H6
46 SW4 25 Scanner Stop Switch C3
PCB6 76 SFDB (Sheet Feed Drive F6
SW5 1 Scanner Switch B4
Board)
57 PCB7 33 SIB (Scanner Interface Board) H2
SW6 34 Toner Hopper Cover Switch C5
SW7 28 Upper Unit Switch 1 C5
51 PCB8 19 SMDB (Scanner Motor Drive A4
56 Board) SW8 28 Upper Unit Switch 2 C5
55 PCB9 35 VDB (Video Drive Board) A2 SW9 72 Left Cutter HP Switch I6
58 PCB10 53 Stamp Board D1 SW10 66 Right Cutter HP Switch I6
59 54
60 53 52 PCB11 56 Interface Board F1
61 Power Packs
PP1 30 CGB Power Pack I3 Index
62 Symbol Description P to P
PP2 49 T&S Power Pack I3 No.
75 QL Others
QL1 15 Quenching Lamp (Left) E6 CO1 52 Recycle Counter D3
74 QL2 15 Quenching Lamp (Center) E6 H1 64 Dehumidifier 1 (Front/Right) D6
QL3 15 Quenching Lamp (Right) E6 H2 65 Dehumidifier 2 (Front/Left) D6
76
73 H3 59 Dehumidifier 3 (Rear Left)) D6
63 H4 62 Dehumidifier 4 (Rear/Right) D6
H5 47 Anti-condensation Heater C6
72 HDD1 51 HDD D1
TH1 41 Hot Roller Thermistor C6
71
TH2 45 Pressure Roller Thermistor C6
TS1 44 Thermostat 1 B6
70 TS2 46 Thermostat 2 B6
69 81
68
67
66 80 77
65 64 79 78
Neptune - C1
(B125)
PARTS CATALOG
PARTS CATALOG
This catalog gives the numbers and names of parts on this machine.
Neptune-C1 (B125)
Roll Feeder Type 240A/B (B641/B642)
Paper Cassette Type 240 (B643)
Table Type 240 (B662)
Hard Disk Drive Type 240 (B663)
Printer Controller RW-240/ (B697/B690)
Interface PCB Type 240
Neptune - C1 (B125)
Neptune - C1 (B125)
PARTS CATALOG
This catalog gives the numbers and names of parts on this machine.
2
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
7. Paper Registrastion (B125) 8. Image Prosessing (B125) 9. Drum Section (B125)
10. Development Unit (B125) 11. Charge & Transfer Unit (B125) 12. Charge Cleaning Section (B125)
3
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
13. Fusing Unit 1 (B125) 14. Fusing Unit 2 (B125) 15. Paper Exit 1 (B125)
16. Paper Exit 2 (B125) 17. Drive Section (B125) 18. Electrical Section 1 (B125)
4
LOCATIONS OF UNITS
19. Electrical Section 2 (B125) 20. Electrical Section 3 (B125) 21. Frame (B125)
5
1.Exterior 1 (B125)
6
1.Exterior 1 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 4720 Side Fence:Left 1 101 0451 3008H Tapping Screw - M3x8
2 B125 4723 Side Fence:Right 1 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
3 B125 2594 Table:Manual Feed 1 103 0453 3008H Binding Self Tapping Screw - M3x8
4 AG07 0014 Magnet Catch 3
5 B125 4813 Cover:Toner Cartridge 1
6 B125 4833 Decal:Emblem:EXP (CHN) 1
7 B125 4806 Sheet:Cover:Toner Cartridge 1
8 AA00 1389 Large Decal - Energy Star 1
9 B125 4881 Decal:Toner Supply 1
10 B125 1286 Cover:Left Upper 1
11 B125 1287 Cover:Left Lower 1
12 B125 1265 Decal:High Temperature:Multi 1
13 B125 1283 Cover:Right Upper 1
14 B125 1288 Cover:Right Lower 1
15 B125 1353 Guide:Original 6
16 B125 1354 Guide Plate:Guide:Original 6
17 B125 1350 Copy Tray:Upper 2
18 B125 1352 Guide Rod 1
19 B125 1351 Guide:Original:Middle 1
20 B010 1359 Operating Instructions Holder 1
21 B125 1355 Guide Plate:Brush 1
22 B125 1474 Rivet:MM5 3
23 B065 1374 Cloth - DF Exposure Glass 1
24 B125 6507 Operating Instructions:System:NA 1
24 B125 8504 Operating Instructions:System:CHN 1
25 B125 6607 Operating Instructions:Copy:NA 1
25 B125 8503 Operating Instructions:Copy:CHN 1
26 B125 1262 Decal:Main Switch:NA 1
26 B125 1263 Decal:Main Switch (EU/CHN) 1
7
2.Exterior 2 (B125)
8
2.Exterior 2 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 2590 Cover:Lower Front 1 101 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
2 5413 3903 Pin - Transfer Guide Plate 1 102 0452 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
3 B125 4720 Side Fence:Left 1 103 0450 3010B Tapping Screw - M3x10
4 B125 4723 Side Fence:Right 1 104 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
5 B125 4704 Original Table:Printing:NA 1 105 0451 3008H Tapping Screw - M3x8
5 B125 4703 Original Table (EU/CHN) 1 106 0451 3012B Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x12
6 B125 1471 Cover:Operation Panel:Inner 1 107 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10
7 B125 1473 Sheet:Operation Panel 1 108 0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer
8 B125 1259 Cover:Control Unit 1
9 B125 1268 Decal:High Temperature:Side 1
10 B125 1284 Cover:Rear Lower 1
11 B125 3655 Cushion:Collection Bottle:Front:2 1
12 B125 3658 Cushion:Collection Bottle:Rear 1
13 A060 3827 Roller Holder 2
14 A060 3826 Toner Collection Bottle Roller 2
15 B125 3688 Leaf Spring:Collection Bottlee 1
16 B125 3661 Collection Bottle:Used Toner 1
17 B125 3662 Decal:Toner Recycling 1
18 5215 5304 Toner Overflow Sensor 1
19 5446 2824 Screw - Duplex Guide Plate 1
20 B125 3669 Holder:Used Toner Sensor 1
21 H072 2207 Guard 2
22 B125 3656 Cushion:Collection Bottle:Front:1 2
23 B125 3668 Shield:Used Toner Sensor 1
9
3.Operation Panel (B125)
10
3.Operation Panel (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 1484 Operation Sub-unit:NA 1 101 0353 0060B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3x6
1 B125 1485 Operation Sub-unit:EU 1 102 0452 3010H Tapping Screw - M3x10
1 B125 1486 Operation Sub-unit:CHN 1 103 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 B125 1490 PCB OPU-NP 1 104 1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N
3 B125 1462 LCD Bracket 1 105 1607 0663 Ferrite Core - TFC-20-10-10
4 H310 5010 LCD 1
5 B125 1468 Lens:Data:In 1
6 B125 1458 Keytop - Ini 1
7 B125 1467 Keytop - Menu 1
8 B125 1466 Keytop - LCD 1
9 B027 7161 Keytop - 10 Key (NA) 1
9 B027 1437 Keytop - 10key (EU/CHN) 1
10 B027 1434 Keytop - Clear/Stop 1
11 B027 1433 Keytop - Start 1
12 B027 1435 Keytop - Try Print 1
13 B027 1441 Keytop - Block Diagram 1
14 B027 7162 Keytop - Reset Switch 1
15 B027 1439 Keytop - Preheat 1
16 B027 1438 Keytop - Interrupt 1
17 B027 1436 Keytop - Main Switch 1
18 B125 1500 Keytop:Copy:Reserve:NA 1
18 B125 1510 Keytop:Copy:Reserve (EU/CHN) 1
19 B027 1449 Keytop - Left Blank 3
20 B125 5680 Harness:DC:Operation Sub-unit:Connecting 1
21 B125 1502 Sheet:LCD:NA 1
21 B125 1511 Sheet:LCD (EU/CHN) 1
22 B125 1501 Sheet:Menu:NA 1
22 B125 1520 Sheet:Menu:CHN 1
23 B027 7164 Sheet - Power Source Display (NA) 1
23 B027 7184 Sheet - Power Source Display (EU/CHN) 1
24 B125 1464 Sheet - PCB 1
11
4.Scanner Section 1 (B125)
12
4.Scanner Section 1 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 A666 4170 Stepped Screw - M3x6 2 36 B125 4751 Shaft:Driven 2
2 B125 4855 Bracket:Platen Plate 2 37 B125 4827 Sheet:Block Light:3 1
3 B125 4809 Cover:Original:Drive 1 38 B125 4828 Sheet:Block Light:4 1
4 B125 5688 Grounding Wire:Scanner Unit:1 2 39 B125 4829 Sheet:Block Light:5 2
5 B125 5683 Ground Wire:Pressure Plate 2 40 B125 4879 Sheet:Shield:Paper Size Sensor 6
6 AA06 3419 Spring - 10n 2 41 B125 4825 Sheet:Block Light:1 1
7 B125 4852 Case:Spring 2 42 B125 4730 Cover:Original:Upper 1
8 B125 4853 Plate:Spring 2 43 B125 4885 Decal:Original:Operate:NA 1
9 B125 4850 Platen Plate 1 43 B125 4925 Decal:Original:Operate:CHN 1
10 B125 4742 Supporting Plate:Cover:Original 1 44 B125 4884 Cover:Original:Switch 1
11 H004 3755 Square Bushing 1 45 AW50 0022 Push Switch 1
12 B125 5680 Harness:DC:Operation Sub-unit:Connecting 1 46 B125 4854 Cushion:Keytop:Original:Stop 1
13 A422 1356 Pin - 3x26mm 2 47 B125 4767 Keytop:Original:Stop 1
14 B125 4732 Stopper:Original:Upper 2 48 B125 4887 Decal:Switch:Stop:NA 1
15 AA06 3415 Original Stopper Spring 2 48 B125 4889 Decal:Switch:Stop:CHN 1
16 A163 6052 Original Table Bushing 2 49 B125 4888 Decal:Lever:Switching:NA 1
17 B125 4761 Shaft:Contact Point:Original:Upper 2 50 B125 4826 Sheet:Block Light:2 4
18 B125 4870 Stand:Pressure Release:Left 1 51 B125 4901 Stopper:Open And Close:Left:Unit 1
19 H072 2207 Guard 2 52 B125 4906 Stopper:Open And Close:Right:Unit 1
20 AA14 3394 Stepped Screw - M3x10 2 53 B125 4856 Sheet:Guide - Pressure Plate 3
21 B125 4864 Knob:Pressure Release 2
22 5413 1882 Stepped Screw 2
23 B125 4866 Bracket:Pressure Release 2 101 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
24 AA06 6370 Left Pressure Release Spring - 5n 2 102 0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
25 AA14 3120 Stepped Screw - M3x3 2 103 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
26 AA06 6371 Right Pressure Release Spring - 5n 1 104 0451 4016B Tapping Screw - M4-16
27 B125 4871 Stand:Pressure Release:Right 1 105 0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
28 AA06 3416 Spring - 3.4n 4 106 0450 4008B Tapping Screw - 4x8
29 AA08 2135 Bushing - Dia4 16 107 0720 0020E Retaining Ring - M2
30 AA06 3418 Spring - 6.6n 4 108 1105 0518 Edge Saddle - LES-1010
31 AA06 3417 Spring - 1.7n 8 109 1105 0516 Clamp
32 AF02 2156 Front Driven Transport Roller 2 110 1105 0487 Harness Clamp
33 AF02 2157 Rear Driven Transport Roller 4 111 0733 0406 Bushing - 4x6
34 B125 4738 Roller:Driven:Original 8 112 0720 0030E Retaining Ring - M3
35 B125 4752 Roller:Driven 2 113 1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N
13
5.Scanner Section 2 (B125)
14
5.Scanner Section 2 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 4682 Guide Plate:Front Lower:A4 1 101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
1 B125 4692 Guide Plate:Front Lower:LT 1 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 B125 4689 Guide:CIS:Front 1 103 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14
3 A498 3118 Stepped Screw -M4 2 104 0574 0050E Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M4x5
4 G568 2839 Tightener - M16 1 105 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
5 5447 2769 Stepped Screw 1 106 1105 0487 Harness Clamp
6 AA06 0943 Belt Tensioner Spring 1 107 1105 0518 Edge Saddle - LES-1010
7 B125 4815 Tensioner:Belt 1 108 1607 0747 FPC Core - FPC-25-12
8 AB03 0745 Pulley - 76T 1 109 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
9 5053 0223 Bushing - 8mm 2 110 0951 3006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer-M3x6
10 AA04 3588 Timing Belt - B60S2M480 1 111 1105 0516 Clamp
11 B125 1728 Spring Plate:Exposure Glass:Left 1
12 B125 1727 Spring Plate:Exposure Glass:Right 1
13 AC01 0006 Exposure Glass 1
14 B125 1649 Contact Image Sensor Unit 1
15 B125 4675 Transport Roller:Original Exhaust 1
16 B125 4696 Guide Plat:Original:Rear Lower 1
17 AA12 0125 Front Discharge Brush 1
18 B125 5686 Harness:DC:Original Sensor:Connect 1
19 AW01 0093 Photo Reflection Sensor - PS-17ND1 1
20 B125 4616 Bracket:Original:Exit Sensor 1
15
6.Scanner Section 3 (B125)
16
6.Scanner Section 3 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 AB03 0746 Pulley - 76T 1 101 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
2 5053 0223 Bushing - 8mm 2 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
3 B125 4652 Bracket:Set Sensor 1 103 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14
4 B125 5691 Harness:DC:Scanner Unit:Set Sensor 1 104 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
5 B125 5689 Grounding Wire:Scanner Unit:2 2 105 1204 2529 Switch - V-5F912DN
6 B125 5619 Clamp:Harness:FFC 13 106 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510
7 B125 4753 Grounding Plate:Original:Frontlower 1 107 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
8 B125 4615 Bracket:Original Sensor:Insert 1 108 1105 0516 Clamp
9 AW01 0093 Photo Reflection Sensor - PS-17ND1 7
10 B125 4613 Bracket:Registration Sensor 1
11 B125 4631 Bracket:Original Sensor:NA 1
11 B125 4630 Bracket:Original Sensor (EU/CHN) 1
12 H004 3755 Square Bushing 2
13 H072 2207 Guard (NA) 17
13 H072 2207 Guard (EU/CHN) 16
14 B125 5681 Harness:DC:Scanner Unit:Connect:NA 1
14 B125 5682 Harness:DC:Scanner:Connecting (EU/CHN) 1
15 B125 4656 Bushing:Arm:Front 3
16 B125 4665 Transport Roller:Original Insert 1
17 B125 5619 Clamp:Harness:FFC 1
18 A666 4170 Stepped Screw - M3x6 2
17
7.Paper Registrastion (B125)
18
7.Paper Registrastion (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 5446 2824 Screw - Duplex Guide Plate 1 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 AA08 2104 Bushing - 8x12x7 2 102 0800 0084 Philips Pan Head Screw - M2.3x12
3 B125 2506 Guide Plate:Lower 1 103 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
4 B125 2585 Left And Right Manual - Feed Sheet 2 104 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
5 B125 2584 Middle Manual - Feed Sheet 1 105 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
6 B125 2572 Guide Plate:Manual Feed 1 106 0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer
7 AF02 0599 Registration Roller 1
8 B125 1185 Gasket:Registration Guide 2
9 B125 2575 Guide Plate:Registration:Upper 1
10 A222 2680 Torque Limiter 1
11 AA06 3900 Registration Compression Spring 4
12 AA08 2135 Bushing - Dia4 4
13 AF02 2128 Transport Driven Roller 2
14 B125 5693 Harness:Registration:Connecting 1
15 G020 4472 Paper Feed Sensor 1
16 B125 2581 Bracket:Sensor 1
17 AW02 0119 Photointerruptor - LG-248l1 1
18 AA06 3277 Middle Plate Spring 2
19 5442 2751 Bushing - Upper Registration Roller 2
20 AF02 0603 Middle Driven Roller 1
21 AA06 6255 Feeler Spring 1
22 B125 2579 Feeler:Registration Sensor 1
23 B125 2580 Holder:Feeler 1
19
8.Image Prosessing (B125)
20
8.Image Prosessing (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 AA13 2013 Spacer 2 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 AB01 7676 Gear - 32/100Z 1 102 0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
3 AB01 7677 Gear/Pulley - 100Z/29T 1 103 0802 5292 Tapping Screw:Round Point:M3X8
4 B125 1116 Bracket:Dcmotor 1 104 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14
5 AX06 0262 Brushless Motor DC 24W 1 105 1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N
6 AA14 3139 Shoulder Screw - Pressure Arm 1 106 1105 0160 Clamp
7 H072 2207 Guard 1 107 1105 0531 Locking Support-emss-4s
8 B125 1971 Plate:Shaft 2 108 1105 0488 Harness Clamp
9 B125 5250 PCB:SMDB 1 109 1105 0516 Clamp
10 B125 5425 PCB:VDB:VDIP 1 110 1105 0409 Card Spacer- 6.4mm
11 B125 5460 PCB:SIB 1 111 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
12 AZ32 0135 Power Pack:CGB 1 112 1204 2529 Switch - V-5F912DN
13 B125 1156 Cover:PCB 1 113 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8
14 B125 5660 Harness:DC:LVDS:Main 1 114 1106 0411 Bushing - 11.5mm
15 B125 5613 Harness:High Voltage:Grid 1 115 1607 0747 FPC Core - FPC-25-12
16 B125 5612 Harness:High Voltage:Bias 1 116 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
17 B125 5614 Harness:High Voltage:Charge 1
18 B125 1858 LED Head Unit 1
21
9.Drum Section (B125)
22
9.Drum Section (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 1141 Tightener:Drum 1 36 AD04 3085 Toner Collection Coil:Cleaning 1
2 GA06 0003 Spring:Guide Plate 1 37 A165 3581 Cleaning Blade 1
3 G568 2839 Tightener - M16 1 38 AA06 2325 Cleaning Blade Spring 2
4 AB03 0764 Pulley - 102T 1 39 B125 3551 Side Plate:Right 1
5 AA04 3922 Timing Belt - 426S2M 1 40 AA15 3133 Blade Right Shield 1
6 B125 2253 Holder:Ball Bearing 1 41 AA06 6664 Toner Outlet Shutter Spring 1
7 B125 3555 Side Plate:Left 1 42 B125 3554 Shutter:Discharge Used Toner 1
8 AA15 3135 Drum Right Shield 2
9 AA15 3134 Blade Left Shield 1
10 B010 2256 Bearing Stopper 1
11 5206 2686 Snap Ring 1
12 AB01 0364 Gear - 46Z 1
13 AA14 3335 Rear Shutter Pin 2
14 AA13 2058 Spacer - 8.1x10 2
15 B125 2469 C-ring:Drum Shaft 1
16 AB01 0363 Gear - 146Z 1
17 AD01 5038 Shaft:Drum 1
18 B010 9510 Drum 1
19 B010 2252 OPC Drum Balancer 2
20 AD01 4030 Drum Flange 1
21 AA06 3276 Pressure Spring 1
22 A163 2255 Spacer 1
23 A163 2251 Drum Knob 1
24 B125 5692 Harness:DC:Cleaning:Connecting 1
25 A232 2367 ID Sensor 1
26 B010 3581 Density Sensor Guide Plate 1
27 B125 3567 Casing:Pickoff Pawl:Welding 1
28 AX10 0026 DC Solenoid - Pick-off Pawl 1 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
29 A163 3611 Pick-off Pawl 1 102 0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
30 A498 3118 Stepped Screw -M4 1 103 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8
31 B010 3582 Blade Release Lever 1 104 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10
32 A163 3608 Left Pressure Lever 1 105 0574 0060E Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M4x6
33 A163 3609 Lever Shaft 1 106 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
34 A163 3607 Right Pressure Lever 1 107 0805 3471 Bushing - M8x22x7
35 B125 3563 Casing:Cleaning 1 108 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
23
10.Development Unit (B125)
24
10.Development Unit (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 3003 Development Unit:EXP 1 101 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
2 AB01 3920 Gear - 30Z 1 102 0720 0050E Retaining Ring - M5
3 5446 1134 Bearing Case 1 103 0633 0200G Pin - M3x20
4 AB01 3921 Gear - 20Z 1 104 0805 3516 Ball Bearing - 10x26x8
5 5205 3103 Bushing - 6mm 2 105 0805 3517 Ball Bearing - 8x16x5
6 AB01 7378 Coupled Gear - 28/24Z 1 106 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
7 AB01 3922 Gear - 28Z 1 107 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10
8 B125 3227 Bearing Case 1 108 0451 3010B Tapping Screw - M3x10
9 AB01 3924 Gear - 28Z 2 109 1105 0042 Wire Band
10 5446 6214 Shaft Holder - Pick-up Roller 1 110 0315 0100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M5x10
11 B125 3205 Stay:Toner Hopper 1
12 AX20 0115 Spring Clutch 1
13 5446 2824 Screw - Duplex Guide Plate 2
14 AA15 3451 Left Shield - Side Plate 1
15 AA15 3450 Right Shield - Side Plate 1
16 A163 3101 Filter Bracket 1
17 AA01 2081 Development Filter 1
18 B010 3150 Entrance Seal 1
19 B125 2582 Bracket:Positioning:Left 1
20 B125 2583 Bracket:Positioning:Right 1
21 B010 3211 Drum Stay:Spring 1
22 B010 3212 Spring:Joint 1
23 B010 3206 Joint:Toner Hopper:Ass'y 1
24 B125 3213 Electrode Plate:Development 1
25 5205 3093 Bushing - 8mm 1
26 AA13 2097 Spacer 1
27 B125 4817 Sheet:Magnet Catch 1
28 AA14 3719 Development Unit Shaft 1
29 5415 2904 Stopper Pin 1
25
11.Charge & Transfer Unit (B125)
26
11.Charge & Transfer Unit (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 3830 T/S Corona Unit 1 101 0951 3006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer-M3x6
2 B125 3855 Sheet:Entrance:Transfer 1 102 0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
3 AD02 2320 End Block Cover - T & S 2 103 0313 0050B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3x5
4 AA06 6254 Corona Wire Spring 2 104 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
5 AD02 2373 End Block:T/S Corona:Left 1 105 0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
6 AD02 2372 End Block:T/S Corona:Right 1 106 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
7 AD02 0059 Corona Wire - Main 1
8 AD02 0072 Corona Wire - Separation 1
9 A174 3938 Left Paper Guide - T/S Outer 1
10 A174 3932 Guide:Paper:T/S Corona:Middle:Left 1
11 A174 3931 Guide:Paper:T/S Corona:Middle:Right 1
12 A174 3937 Right Paper Guide - T/S Outer 1
13 B125 3868 Shielding Plate:Harness 1
14 AD00 4103 Charge Corona Unit 1
15 AD02 2316 Left End Block - Charge 1
16 A163 2052 Left Grid Terminal 1
17 AA06 0749 Spring 4
18 AD02 2317 Left End Block Cover - Charge 1
19 AD02 0089 Charge Corona Wire - G 1
20 AD02 0090 Grid Wire 4
21 AA06 0750 Spring 1
22 B125 2060 Cleaner:Slider 1
23 B125 2061 Cleaner:Charge Corona 1
24 AD02 2370 End Block: Chage Right 1
25 B125 2018 Terminal:Grid:Right 1
26 AD02 2369 End Block Cover - Charge Corona 1
27 B010 2062 Left Holder - Charge Corona 1
28 B010 2061 Right Holder - Charge Corona 1
27
12.Charge Cleaning Section (B125)
28
12.Charge Cleaning Section (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 A675 2629 Stepper Motor Cushion 1 101 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10
2 B125 4770 Stepper Motor - DC24V 34.8W 1 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
3 B125 5657 Harness:DC:Charge:Connecting:1 1 103 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
4 B125 2041 Discharge Lamp:Unit 1 104 1105 0489 Harness Clamp - LWS 1316
5 AA14 3786 Stepped Screw:M3x10.3 2 105 1105 0348 Clamp
6 AA14 3787 Stepped Screw:M3x14.2 2 106 0708 0040Z Flat Washer-M4
7 AB03 2723 Pulley:Left 2 107 1102 6245 Relay Connector - 2P
8 AB03 2724 Pulley:Encoder 1 108 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510
9 AB01 7664 Gear:Pulley:Right 1 109 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14
10 AA05 0113 Wire:Cleaner 1 110 0252 0020B Philips Pan Head Screw - M2x2
11 B125 2085 Tension Spring:4291mn 1
12 AW02 0075 Photointerruptor 1
13 B125 2070 Bracket 1
14 AX50 0074 Discharge Lamp P2 3
15 B125 5690 Harness:DC:Ql:Connecting 1
16 B125 2125 Guard:Spring Plate:Left 1
17 B125 2124 Spring Plate:Charge Corona:Left 1
18 B125 2106 Spring Plate:Earth 1
19 B125 2127 Spring Plate:Charge Corona:Right 1
20 B125 2128 Guard:Spring Plate:Right 1
21 AX04 0061 Cleaner Motor - DC 0.5W 1
22 B125 4755 Seal:Shield 1
23 B125 4697 Bushing:Arm:Rear 3
24 B125 4754 Grounding Plate:Original:Rear Lower 3
25 B125 4756 Guard:Grounding Plate:Rear 6
26 B125 2113 Holder:Wire 1
27 AA06 0750 Spring 1
28 B125 2130 Shielding Plate:Charge Corona 1
29
13.Fusing Unit 1 (B125)
30
13.Fusing Unit 1 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 4001 Fusing Unit:120V 1 34 AA12 0087 Fusing Discharge Brush 1
1 B125 4002 Fusing Unit:220/240V 1
2 5403 2075 Stepped Screw 1
3 B125 4172 Lever:Pressure 1
4 AA06 0607 Pressure Spring 2
5 B125 4130 C-ring:MM50 2
6 AB01 4268 Gear:Drive:Fusing 1
7 AE03 1056 Bushing - Fusing 2
8 B125 4137 Cover:Heater 2
9 B125 4136 Bracket:Heater:Left 1
10 A023 4096 Fusing Lamp Supporter 2
11 B125 4173 Lever:Pressure Release:Lower 2
12 AX45 0042 Heater:120V:1150W 1
12 AX45 0043 Heater:230V:1150W 1
13 AE01 1085 Hot Roller - MM50 1
14 B125 4148 Holder:Pressure Roller 2
15 A163 4109 C - Ring - 19m 4
16 AE03 0041 Ball Bearing -20x32x7 2
17 AE02 0148 Pressure Roller:MM55 1
18 B125 4145 Shaft:Pressure Roller 1
19 B125 4194 Guide Plate:Fusing Exit:Lower 1
20 B125 4195 Guide:Auxiliary:Fusing Exit 12
21 AE04 4055 Pressure Roller Pickoff Pawl 11
22 AA06 0942 Pressure Roller Pickoff Pawl Spring 11
23 5887 4176 Screw 11
24 B125 4211 Fusing Cover:Upper 1
25 B125 4215 Heat Insulation:Cover:Fusing 1
26 AW01 0091 Photo Reflection Sensor 1
27 H041 1549 Trast Screw 2
28 B125 4214 Lever:Cleaning Roller:Left 1
29 5053 0447 Bushing - 6mm 1
30 AE04 2047 Fusing Cleaning Roller 1 101 0954 3006M Screw - M3x6
31 AA08 3016 Roller Clutch - 6x14x10 1 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
32 B125 4213 Lever:Cleaning Roller:Right 1 103 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14
33 B125 4135 Bracket:Heater:Right 1 104 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
31
14.Fusing Unit 2 (B125)
32
14.Fusing Unit 2 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 A163 4183 Upper Pressure Release Lever 2 101 0954 3006M Screw - M3x6
2 B125 4174 Shaft:Lever:Pressure Release 2 102 0954 3008N Screw - M3X8
3 B125 5602 Harness:AC:Fusing:Connecting:1 1 103 0954 3012N Screw - M3X12
4 B125 4156 Electrode Plate:Thermostat 1 104 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
5 B104 4085 Thermostat Housing 3 105 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8
6 B125 4151 Stay:Fusing:Upper 1 106 0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
7 AW10 0087 Fusing Thermistor 1 107 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
8 B004 4087 Plate- Thermistor 1 108 1105 0290 Harness Clamp - Horizontal
9 AW11 0036 Thermostat:200C 250V/10A 1
10 AW11 0035 Thermostat:199C 250V/10A 1
11 B125 5606 Harness:AC:Fusing:Connect:120V 1
11 B125 5607 Harness:AC:Fusing:Connect:220/230V 1
12 B125 4185 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate:Ass'y 1
13 A163 4122 Entrance Guide Plate Holder 2
14 A163 4124 Holder Cam 1
15 B125 1269 Sheet:Fusing:Small 1
16 B125 1271 Sheet:Fusing:Large 1
17 B125 4162 Bracket:Thermistor 1
18 AW10 0053 Thermistor - Rear 1
33
15.Paper Exit 1 (B125)
34
15.Paper Exit 1 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 4469 Fusing/Paper Exit Unit:EXP 1 101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
2 A163 4159 Lock Positioning Plate 2 102 0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
3 AA06 6257 Left Lock Spring 1 103 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
4 AA06 6256 Right Lock Spring 1 104 0805 3385 Bushing - 6mm
5 AA00 0226 Decal:Warning:High Temperature 1 105 0805 0089 Retaining Ring - M4
6 B010 4312 Upper Guide 6 106 1105 0516 Clamp
7 B125 4480 Exit Roller:Drive:Upper 4
8 AA14 0844 Shaft:Exit Roller 2
9 A163 4236 Exit Tube 1
10 A163 4235 Tube Holder 1
11 B125 4477 Guide:Fusing/Paper Exit:Middle 1
12 B125 4478 Exit Roller:Drive:Lower 4
13 B125 4498 Seal:Guide:Right Upper 1
14 B125 4497 Seal:Guide:Left Upper 1
15 B125 4499 Grip:Exit 2
16 B125 4475 Guide:Fusing/Paper Exit Unit 2
17 AA06 6052 Stripper Spring 13
18 AE04 4054 Stripper Pawls 13
19 AA08 2101 Bushing - 6x10x6 2
20 AB03 0474 Pulley - 24T 1
21 AA06 6643 Arm Spring 1
22 B010 4324 Idler Gear - 30z 1
23 B125 4488 Arm:Drive:Fusing/Exit Unit 1
24 AB01 7680 Gear/Pulley - 24Z/24T 1
25 AA04 3527 Timing Belt - 230XL 1
26 A163 4231 Arm Stopper 1
27 AA00 0235 Decal:Warning:High Temperature 1
35
16.Paper Exit 2 (B125)
36
16.Paper Exit 2 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 4450 Paper Exit Unit 1 101 0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8
2 A090 5596 LED Grounding Wire 1 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
3 B125 4455 Bracket:Lock:Exit:Right 1 103 0353 0040B Screw - M3X4
4 B125 4456 Positioning Plate:Exit 2 104 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
5 5403 2075 Stepped Screw 2 105 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
6 AA06 0386 Pressure Spring 2 106 1105 0328 Harness Clamp - ES-0505
7 B125 4451 Cover:Exit 1 107 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
8 A163 4453 Exit Driven Roller 8
9 B125 4452 Leaf Spring:Exit Roller:Upper 4
10 B125 4453 Leaf Spring:Exit Roller:Lower 4
11 B125 4460 Bracket:Lock:Exit:Left 1
12 B010 4461 Grounding Wire - Paper Exit Unit 1
13 B125 5643 Ground Wire:Scanner Unit:3 1
14 A174 4372 Gate Pawl Drive 1
15 AA08 2101 Bushing - 6x10x6 2
16 B125 4458 Guide Plate:Exit 1
17 B125 5671 Harness:DC:Original Exit:Connecting 1
18 AW02 0056 Photointerruptor - EE-SX4235A-P1 1
19 B010 4458 Gate Pawl Plate 1
20 AF02 5029 Exit Separation Pawl 1
21 AA05 0101 Spring 1
22 B125 4463 DC Solenoid:Gate Pawl 1
23 B125 5658 Grounding Wire:Paper Exit Unit 1
24 B125 4462 Stay:Exit 1
25 AA00 3210 Decal - Grip 2
26 B125 4464 Gasket:Guide Plate:Exit 1
37
17.Drive Section (B125)
38
17.Drive Section (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 1123 Drum Stay:Drive 1 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 5918 3120 Stud - M4 1 102 0451 3008H Tapping Screw - M3x8
3 AA06 0092 Release Spring 1 103 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8
4 B125 1136 Tightener:Fusing 1 104 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6
5 G568 2839 Tightener - M16 1 105 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
6 AW02 0119 Photointerruptor - LG-248l1 1 106 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
7 AA04 3911 Timing Belt - S3M420 1 107 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
8 AB01 7675 Gear/Pulley - 30Z/63T 1 108 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510
9 A259 1158 Pulley Flange 1 109 0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer
10 AB01 7674 Gear/Pulley - 66Z/20T 1 110 1204 2533 Switch - AJ76200PZ02
11 AB01 7673 Gear - 40/82Z 1 111 1105 0409 Card Spacer- 6.4mm
12 AB01 7672 Gear - 19/120Z 1 112 1105 0516 Clamp
13 AB01 7671 Gear/Pulley - 32Z/70T 1
14 AA04 3644 Timing Belt - B60S2M214 1
15 AB01 4265 Gear - 28Z 1
16 B125 1146 Arm:Coupling:Development 1
17 B125 1147 Shaft:Coupling:Development 1
18 AA06 0117 Spring 1
19 AB01 4263 Gear - 50Z 1
20 AB01 4267 Gear - 46Z 1
21 G020 4444 Tightener 1
22 B125 1125 Tightener:Development 1
23 AA06 0244 Spring 1
24 AB01 7669 Gear - 62/30Z 1
25 AA04 3643 Timing Belt - B100S2M264 1
26 AB01 7667 Timing Pulley - 18Z/66T 1
27 A548 2139 Pulley 1
28 B125 1130 Tightener:Registration 1
29 5215 4121 Spring - Oil Blade 1
30 B125 1101 Side Plate:Drive 1
31 AX06 0262 Brushless Motor DC 24W 1
32 AX21 0079 Magnetic Clutch 1
33 AX06 0271 Brushless Motor - DC24V/45W 1
34 B125 1261 Bracket:Cover:Lower 1
35 B624 2530 Spacer:Pressure Plate:Front 1
39
18.Electrical Section 1 (B125)
40
18.Electrical Section 1 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 4358 Grounding Plate:Fusing 1 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 B125 3873 Guard:Leaf Spring 2 102 0451 3030B Tapping Screw - 3x30
3 B125 1169 Insulating Sheet:Cable 1 103 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
4 B125 1168 Cover:Printed Circuit Board 1 104 1105 0529 Nylon Clamp:EMT-3N
5 B125 1264 Bracket:Cover:Lower:2 2 105 1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N
6 B125 5652 Harness:DC:Machine Or Copier:Left 1 106 1105 0490 Harness Clamp - IWS-2218
7 B125 5649 Harness:DC:Machine Or Copier:Right 1 107 1407 5113 IC - RAM STK15C68-PF45
8 B125 5291 PCB:MCU-NP:NA 1 108 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
8 B125 5292 PCB:MCU-NP:EU 1 109 1105 0488 Harness Clamp
8 B125 5246 PCB:MCU-NP:CHN 1 110 1105 0521 Clamp - LES-1017
9 B125 5219 PCB:Image Processing Unit:EXP 1
10 B125 1190 Insulating Sheet:IPU/MCU 1
11 B125 1180 Base:PCB 1
12 B125 1194 Seal:Fan:MCU/IPU 1
13 AX64 0124 Fan Motor - DC3.36W 1
14 B125 1186 Gasket:Tray:IPU/MCU:Upper 1
15 AX31 0043 Total Counter 1
16 B125 1191 Holder:C/T Box 1
17 B125 5654 Harness:DC:Operation Panel 1
18 B125 5660 Harness:DC:LVDS:Main 1
19 B010 5225 IC-HDC 1
20 B125 1186 Gasket:Tray:IPU/MCU:Upper 1
21 AA15 2381 Ozone Filter Upper Seal 1
22 B125 9590 Counter:RAM:STK15C88-WF45 1
41
19.Electrical Section 2 (B125)
42
19.Electrical Section 2 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 5840 3022 Stopper Screw - M3 2 101 0314 0100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M4x10
2 B125 4282 Cover:Fusing:Upper 1 102 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
3 AA00 3209 Decal - Misfeed Removal Exit 1 103 0802 5285 Screw - 3X8
4 AA00 3210 Decal - Grip 2 104 0802 5220 Tapping Screw - M4x8
5 B125 4285 Seal:Cover:Fusing:Harness 1 105 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
6 B125 5699 Harness:DC:Fan:Connecting 1 106 1105 0487 Harness Clamp
7 AA01 0117 Exhaust Ozone Filter 1 107 1105 0490 Harness Clamp - IWS-2218
8 B125 4293 Fan Motor:DC24V 8.5W 1 108 1105 0517 Harness Clamp - LWS-2111Z
9 B125 4291 Guide Plate:Duct 1 109 1105 0160 Clamp
10 B125 4292 Shield:Front:Guide Plate:Duct 1 110 1105 0518 Edge Saddle - LES-1010
11 A134 1195 Seal - Fan Harness 1 120 1107 0932 Fuse:T10AH 250VC (120V)
12 B125 4283 Duct:Louver 1 120 1107 1054 Fuse - HT-6.3A-N5 (220V/240V)
13 B125 5616 Harness:High Voltage:Transfer 1 121 1107 0629 Fuse Ceramic Case 15A 125V (120V)
14 B125 5617 Harness:High Voltage:Separation 1 121 1107 1054 Fuse - HT-6.3A-N5 (220V/240V)
15 AZ32 0128 Power Pack:TD 1 122 1107 1067 Fuse - ET-6.3A
16 B125 1171 Bracket:Power Pack 1 123 1105 0516 Clamp
17 B125 5604 Harness:AC:Main 1
18 B125 5608 Harness:AC:Fusing:120V 1
18 B125 5609 Harness:AC:Fusing:220/230V 1
19 AZ23 0129 Power Supply Unit 100-120V DOM/NA 1
19 AZ23 0130 Power Supply Unit:220-240:EU/AA/CHN 1
20 A250 5741 Power Supply Cord - 120V 1
20 A250 5742 Power Supply Cord - 230V 1
20 AZ00 0075 Power Supply Coard (CHN) 1
21 B125 1170 Bracket:Power Supply Cord 1
22 B125 4358 Grounding Plate:Fusing 2
23 B125 1057 Cove:Harness Clamp 2
43
20.Electrical Section 3 (B125)
44
20.Electrical Section 3 (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 3659 Cushion:Swivel:Stopper 1 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
2 B125 3671 Vibrating Plate:Collection Bottle 1 102 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6
3 B125 3674 Cam:Gear:Swivel 1 103 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14
4 A134 3162 DC Motor - 5.85W 1 104 0451 3025B Tapping Screw - M3x25
5 B125 3672 Bracket:Swivel:Collection Bottle 1 105 1204 2529 Switch - V-5F912DN
6 AA14 5830 Swing Unit Idler Shaft 1 106 1204 2521 Micro Switch
7 B125 3864 Leaf Spring:T/S Corona 2 107 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
8 B125 3869 Guide Plate:T/S Corona:Lower 1 108 1105 0487 Harness Clamp
9 B125 3871 Grounding Plate:T/S Corona:Mid 3 109 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510
10 B125 3872 Cover:Transfer Corona:Lower 1 110 1105 0348 Clamp
11 B125 3873 Guard:Leaf Spring 4 111 1106 0200 Bushing - 19.44mm
12 AW02 0075 Photointerruptor 1
13 AX40 0127 Heater - 120V 13W 2
13 AX40 0128 Heater - 230V 13W 1
14 B125 3865 Guide Plate:Transport 1
15 B125 1266 Decal:High Temperature:Vertical 1
16 B125 4356 Cover:Safety Switch 1
17 B125 3683 Shield:Joint:Upper 1
18 B125 3681 Joint:Collection Bottle 1
19 B125 1085 Lever:Micro Switch 1
20 B125 1084 Bracket:Latch:Right 1
21 AB01 7347 Idle Gear 2
22 A571 7665 Screw - M2.6X5 1
23 B125 3687 Spring Washer:WW-6012 1
24 B104 5999 Gasket:STG10-10:20mm 1
45
21.Frame (B125)
46
21.Frame (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 B125 1097 Knob:Lever 2 36 B125 4351 Bracket:Roller 5
2 AA06 0456 Fusing Cover Spring 2 37 B125 4359 Roller:Separation:Small 5
3 B125 1095 Lever:Machine Or Copier:Left 1
4 B125 1096 Lever:Machine Or Copier:Right 1
5 B125 4344 Cam:Pressure Release:Fusing:Left 1
6 B125 4343 Cam:Pressure Release:Fusing:Right 1
7 B125 1100 Pin:Hinge 2
8 B125 1091 Bracket:Contact Point:Outer:Left 1
9 B125 1092 Bracket:Contact Point:Outer:Right 1
10 B125 1093 Bracket:Contact Point:Inner:Left 1
11 B125 1094 Bracket:Contact Point:Inner:Right 1
12 B125 1086 Gas Spring 2
13 B125 1087 Shaft:Gas Spring:Upper 2
14 B125 1088 Anchor:Gas Spring 2
15 B125 1056 Stand 4
16 B125 4353 Ground Plate:Exhaust 1
17 AA15 2390 Shealding Seal 2
18 AA14 3404 Stepped Screw - M4 1
19 AA14 3771 Shoulder Screw - M3 1 101 0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6
20 AA00 0225 Decal:High Temperature:120C 1 102 0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6
21 B125 1162 Bracket:Fix:Fusing Unit:Left 1 103 0720 0050E Retaining Ring - M5
22 B125 1161 Bracket:Fix:Fusing Unit:Right 1 104 0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4
23 B125 1183 Inner Duct Shield 1 105 0965 5016B Tapping Screw W/h Flat Washer-M5x16
24 B125 1003 Exhaust Duct 1 106 0720 0080E Retaining Ring - M8
25 B125 1264 Bracket:Cover:Lower:2 2 107 0802 5220 Tapping Screw - M4x8
26 B125 1261 Bracket:Cover:Lower 2 108 0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer
27 B125 1267 Sheet:Lgd 1 109 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC
28 A232 4058 Rear Collar - Pressure Lever 1 110 1105 0489 Harness Clamp - LWS 1316
29 AA14 3347 Lever Stopper Shaft 1 111 1105 0516 Clamp
30 B125 3679 Bracket:Roller:Collection Bottle 1 112 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510
31 5403 1910 Spring Anchor - Stopper Lever 1 113 1105 0521 Clamp - LES-1017
32 A257 1121 Front Screw 1 114 1106 0458 Bushing - 9.9mm
33 H072 2207 Guard 2 115 0707 6200B Bushing - Dia6x20
34 B125 4352 Guide:Bracket:Roller 5 116 1105 0517 Harness Clamp - LWS-2111Z
35 A163 4347 Separation Roller 5 117 1105 0490 Harness Clamp - IWS-2218
47
22.Main Control Board (B125)
48
22.Main Control Board (B125)
49
22.Main Control Board (B125)
50
22.Main Control Board (B125)
51
22.Main Control Board (B125)
52
22.Main Control Board (B125)
53
22.Main Control Board (B125)
22.Main Control Board (B125)
54
22.Main Control Board (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
* B125 5291 PCB:MCU-NP:NA 1 101 1102 3822 Connector - 20P
* B125 5292 PCB:MCU-NP:EU 1 102 1102 4201 Connector - 2P
* B125 5246 PCB:MCU-NP:CHN 1 103 1102 4211 CT Header - 12P
1 A232 5350 IC - HG71C103FD 1 104 1102 5007 CT Header - 14P
2 A232 5355 IC - GATEX 1 105 1102 5305 Connector - 6P
3 A232 5371 MPU CSS 1 106 1102 5344 Connector - 16P
107 1102 5411 Connector - 24P
108 1102 5476 Modular Cord - 6p/6p
109 1102 5477 Modular Cord - 6p/4p
110 1102 5944 Connector - 3P
111 1102 6298 Connector - 5P
112 1102 6299 Connector - 6P
113 1102 6301 Connector - 8P
114 1102 6304 Connector - 11P
115 1102 6396 Connector - 1P
116 1102 6397 Box Header
117 1102 6515 Connector - 34P
118 1102 6789 Connector - 100P
119 1102 7834 Connector - B2B
120 1102 8242 Connector:53375-0710
121 1102 8466 Connector:55447-0210
122 1102 8471 Connector - 55447-071
123 1102 8490 Connector:55451-3210
124 1102 8494 Connector - 55451-4010
125 1102 8661 Connector - FCN-564P068-G/SC-4V
126 1102 9083 Connector:53375-1110
127 1104 0588 DIP Socket - 28p
128 1104 0683 Socket - IMSA-9206H-GF
129 1104 0771 IC Socket - 28PIN
130 1109 0018 Circuit Protector - SMD100
131 1109 0020 Circuit Protector:SMD150/33
132 1206 0054 Lithium Cell - CR2032-1HS
133 1400 0710 Transistor - 2SB1240
134 1400 0730 Transistor - 2SD1782K
135 1400 0822 Transistor - 2SA1900
55
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
136 1402 1322 Diode Array - DAN202U 171 1408 1401 Series Regulator - TA7808F
137 1402 1342 Diode - 1SR154-400 172 1503 1004 Oscilator - 19.6608Mhz
138 1402 1343 Diode - RB106L-40 173 1601 7877 Resistor Array 4.7k Ω ±5% 1/32W
139 1402 1365 Diode-RB75LV-40 174 1601 7886 Resistor Array 3.3k Ω ±5% 1/32W
140 1402 1584 Diode - DAN217U 175 1601 7887 Resistor Array - 10K Ω ±5% 1/32W
141 1403 0953 LED - SML-310MT 176 1601 7898 Resistor Array
142 1403 0978 LED - SML-310DT 177 1601 7959 Resistor
143 1404 0238 Serge Absorber 22V 0.6J 178 1601 7960 Resistor Array - 100 Ω ±5% 1/16W
144 1407 1535 IC - TD62308AP 179 1601 7983 Resistor Array:2.2kΩ:±5%:1/16W
145 1407 2187 TTLIC - SN74LS07NS 180 1605 1106 Ceramic Capacitor - 2200 pF ±10% 50V
146 1407 2231 IC - TD62308AF 181 1605 1137 Capacitor - 470pF ±10% 50V
147 1407 3550 IC TC74HC07AF 182 1605 1148 Capacitor - 0.1µF+80-20% 50V
148 1407 4114 IC - SN751177 183 1605 1287 Capacitor - 0.47µF+80-20% 25V
149 1407 4614 IC - TA7291P 184 1607 0732 Noise Filter - AEF321825-470
150 1407 4773 IC:RTC-4543SA 185 1607 1580 Filter:NFR21GD1016802B
151 1407 4959 IC - MC68334GCFC20 186 1610 1637 Resistor:1 Ω:±1%:1/2w:3216
152 1407 5151 IC - MBM29F160TE70TN 187 1630 1161 Resistor - 160Ω ±5% 1/8W
153 1407 5344 IC - SN74LV02APW 188 1634 0000 Resistor - 0 Ω 1/16W
154 1407 5345 IC-SN74LV04APW 189 1640 5101 Capacitor - 100µF±20% 50V
155 1407 5346 IC - SN74LS74ANS 190 1640 5470 Capacitor - 47µF±20% 50V
156 1407 5347 IC - SN74LV08APW 191 1642 5100 Capacitor - 10µF±20% 50V
157 1407 5350 IC - SN74LV00APW 192 1642 5109 Capcitor - 1µF- ±20% - 50V
158 1407 5351 IC - SN74LV14APW 193 1642 5220 Capacitor - 22µF±20% 50V
159 1407 5353 IC - SN74LV244APW 194 1642 5330 Capacitor - 33µF±20% 50V
160 1407 5363 IC - SN74AHCT04PW 195 1650 2101 Resistor - 100Ω ±5% 1/4W
161 1407 5376 IC - SN74LV32APW 196 1650 2121 Resistor:120Ω:±5%:1/4W:3216
162 1407 5394 IC:SN74LV138APW 197 1650 2392 Resistor - 3.9KΩ±5% 1/4W
163 1407 5457 Clock Generator - W180-51G 198 1650 4100 Resistor - 10Ω ±5% 1/10W
164 1407 5469 IC - SN74LV07APW 199 1650 4101 Resistor - 100Ω±5%1/10W
165 1407 5592 CMOS Logic:SN74LV139APW 200 1650 4102 Resistor - 1KΩ ±5% 1/10W
166 1407 5703 IC - CD4053BPW 201 1650 4103 Resistor - 10KΩ ±5% 1/10W
167 1407 5713 IC:SN74LV06APW 202 1650 4104 Resistor - 100KΩ±5%1/10W
168 1408 0575 IC - M51957BFP 203 1650 4121 Resistor - 120Ω±5%1/10W
169 1408 0875 Transistor-array - TD62382AF 204 1650 4154 Resistor 150kΩ ±5% 1/10W
170 1408 1095 IC - BA10324AF 205 1650 4163 Resistor 16kΩ ±5% 1/10W 1608
56
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
206 1650 4181 Resistor - 180Ω±5%1/10W
207 1650 4202 Resistor - 2KΩ±5%1/10W
208 1650 4203 Resistor - 20KΩ ±5% 1/10W
209 1650 4204 Resistor - 200KΩ±5%1/10W
210 1650 4222 Resistor - 2.2KΩ±5%1/10W
211 1650 4243 Resistor - 24KΩ±5%1/10W
212 1650 4272 Resistor - 2.7KΩ±5%1/10W
213 1650 4330 Chip Resistor - 33Ω ±5% 1/10W
214 1650 4332 Resistor - 3.3KΩ±5%1/10W
215 1650 4391 Resistor - 390Ω ±5% 1/10W
216 1650 4392 Chip Resistor - 3.9kΩ±5%1/10W
217 1650 4472 Resistor - 4.7KΩ ±5% 1/10W
218 1650 4473 Resistor - 47KΩ±5%1/10W
219 1650 4513 Resistor - 51KΩ±5%1/10W
220 1650 4562 Resistor - 5.6KΩ ±5% 1/10W
221 1650 4620 Resistor 62Ω ±5% 1/10W
222 1650 4751 Resistor - 750Ω ±5% 1/10W
223 1650 4752 Resistor:7.5kΩ:±5%:1/10W:1608
224 1654 1022 Resistor:10.2kΩ:±1%:1/10W:1608
225 1654 1961 Resistor - 1.96KΩ±1%1/10W
226 1654 3002 Resistor - 30KΩ±1%1/10W
227 1654 3831 Resistor - 3.83KΩ ±1% 1/10W 1608
228 1654 5231 Resistor - 5.23KΩ±1%1/10W
229 1654 5360 Resistor - 536Ω ±1% 1/10W 1608
230 1660 0100 Capacitor - 10PF ±0.5pF 50V
231 1660 2221 Capacitor - 220pF +80-20% 50V
232 1660 2470 Capacitor - 47pF ±5% 50V
233 1660 6103 Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
234 1902 0043 IC - 4MX8 70NS G2
235 1904 0031 SRAM - CY7C1021 1M X16 70ns G1
236 1407 5112 IC - RAM STK15C88-W45
237 1102 6297 Connector - 4P
57
23.IPU Board (B125)
58
23.IPU Board (B125)
59
23.IPU Board (B125)
60
23.IPU Board (B125)
61
23.IPU Board (B125)
62
23.IPU Board (B125)
63
23.IPU Board (B125)
64
23.IPU Board (B125)
65
23.IPU Board (B125)
66
23.IPU Board (B125)
67
23.IPU Board (B125)
68
23.IPU Board (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
* B125 5219 PCB:Image Processing Unit:EXP 1 101 1102 5303 Connector - 4P
1 A297 5350 IC - TC220C820TB-510 1 102 1102 6395 Connector - 1P
2 B010 5225 IC-HDC 1 103 1102 6396 Connector - 1P
3 B010 5355 IC - RF5C689 1 104 1102 6790 Conector - 100R-LT-N1
4 B125 5431 IC:VDIP:RB5C619 1 105 1102 8090 Connector - TX25-30P-12ST-N1
106 1102 8091 Connector - 53505-4010
107 1102 8515 Connector:DX20M-68S
108 1104 0597 IC Socket - 64p - SN
109 1400 0810 Transistor:DTC114EUA
110 1402 1515 Diode UDZS6.2B
111 1403 0953 LED - SML-310MT
112 1403 0978 LED - SML-310DT
113 1407 4323 TTL - TD74ABT244F
114 1407 5090 IC - DS90CF364MTD
115 1407 5174 CMOS - SN74LVC04APW
116 1407 5178 IC - ABT245
117 1407 5179 IC - ABT374 SOP
118 1407 5334 IC - CMOS LOGIC 74LVC244A TSSOP
119 1407 5350 IC - SN74LV00APW
120 1407 5351 IC - SN74LV14APW
121 1407 5353 IC - SN74LV244APW
122 1407 5366 IC - 74LVC08A TSSOP
123 1407 5368 IC - 74LVC245A TSSOP
124 1407 5376 IC - SN74LV32APW
125 1407 5392 IC:SN74LV541APW
126 1407 5394 IC:SN74LV138APW
127 1407 5463 IC - SN74LV245APW
128 1407 5705 IC - SN74LVC06APW
129 1407 5712 IC:SN74lV07ANS
130 1407 5793 Clock Generator:HD151TS304RP
131 1407 6109 Controller:RF5V861-1020
132 1407 6237 Clock Generator:MB88154PNF-G-112-E1
133 1408 1454 Series Regulator - LM1085IS-3.3
134 1408 1650 Series Regulator:LM1084IS-ADJ
135 1503 0899 Crystal Oscilator - 15.936Mhz
69
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
136 1503 0902 Crystal Oscilator - 40Mhz 171 1650 4101 Resistor - 100Ω±5%1/10W
137 1503 1151 Crystal Oscilator:33.33Mhz 172 1650 4102 Resistor - 1KΩ ±5% 1/10W
138 1503 1152 Crystal Oscilator:20Mhz 173 1650 4103 Resistor - 10KΩ ±5% 1/10W
139 1503 1153 Crystal Oscilator:19.44Mhz 174 1650 4104 Resistor - 100KΩ±5%1/10W
140 1601 7752 Resistor Array - 10K Ω ±5% 175 1650 4121 Resistor - 120Ω±5%1/10W
141 1601 7757 Resistor 0Ω 176 1650 4152 Resistor - 1.5KΩ ±5% 1/10W
142 1601 7867 Resistor - 33 Ω ±5% 1/16W 177 1650 4220 Chip Resistor - 22Ω ±5% 1/10W
143 1601 7868 Resister Array - 82 Ω ±5% 1/16W 178 1650 4222 Resistor - 2.2KΩ±5%1/10W
144 1601 7886 Resistor Array 3.3k Ω ±5% 1/32W 179 1650 4223 Resistor - 22KΩ±5%1/10W
145 1601 7887 Resistor Array - 10K Ω ±5% 1/32W 180 1650 4330 Chip Resistor - 33Ω ±5% 1/10W
146 1601 7898 Resistor Array 181 1650 4332 Resistor - 3.3KΩ±5%1/10W
147 1601 7900 Resistor Array - 0 Ω ±5% 182 1650 4430 Resistor - 43Ω±5%:1/10W
148 1601 7959 Resistor 183 1650 4472 Resistor - 4.7KΩ ±5% 1/10W
149 1601 7960 Resistor Array - 100 Ω ±5% 1/16W 184 1650 4511 Resistor - 510Ω±5%1/10W
150 1604 4728 Capacitor - 100µF±20% 16V 185 1650 4519 Resistor:5.1Ω:±5%:1/10W
151 1605 1038 Capacitor:680pF:±10%:50V 186 1650 4562 Resistor - 5.6KΩ ±5% 1/10W
152 1605 1161 Capacitor - 0.33µF±10% 10V 187 1650 4563 Resistor - 56KΩ±5%1/10W
153 1605 1212 Capacitor - 470pF ±10% 50V 188 1650 4620 Resistor 62Ω ±5% 1/10W
154 1605 1228 Capacitor:0.1uf:±10%:25V 189 1650 4680 Resistor - 68Ω±5%1/10W
155 1605 1234 Capcitor:4700pF:±10%:50V 190 1650 4682 Resistor - 6.8KΩ ±5% 1/10W
156 1605 1250 Capcitor:0.068uf:±10%:10V 191 1650 4820 Resistor - 82Ω ±5% 1/10W
157 1605 1306 Capacitor - 1µF±10% 10V 192 1654 1100 Resistor - 110Ω±1% 1/10W
158 1605 1355 Ceramic Capacitor:680pF:±10%:50V 193 1654 1210 Resistor - 121Ω ±1% 1/10W
159 1605 1357 Capacitor:10uf:±10%:6.3V 194 1654 1500 Resistor - 150Ω±1 %1/10W
160 1605 1358 Capacitor - 10µF±10% 10V 195 1654 2001 Chip Resistor - 2kΩ ±1% 1/10W
161 1605 1371 Capacitor:4.7uf:+80-20%:6.3V 196 1654 5109 Resistor:51Ω:±1%:1/10W
162 1607 0861 Filter - BK2125HS101 197 1654 5609 Resistor:56Ω:±1%:1/10W
163 1607 1486 Filter:BLM31PG330SN1B 198 1660 0100 Capacitor - 10PF ±0.5pF 50V
164 1610 1731 Resistor:24k Ω:±0.5%:1/10W:1608 199 1660 2151 Capacitor - 150pF ±20% 35V
165 1630 4102 Resistor - 1.0KΩ ±5% 1/16W 200 1660 2330 Capacitor - 33pF - ±5% - 50V
166 1634 0000 Resistor - 0 Ω 1/16W 201 1660 2470 Capacitor - 47pF ±5% 50V
167 1640 0471 Capacitor - 470µF±20% 10V 202 1660 2471 Capacitor - 470pF - ±5% - 50V
168 1640 6102 Capacitor:1000uf:±20%:6.3V 203 1660 4103 Capacitor - 10000pF - ±10% - 50V
169 1642 6331 Capacitor:330uf:±20%:6.3V 204 1660 4222 Capacitor - 2200pF - ±10% - 50V
170 1650 4100 Resistor - 10Ω ±5% 1/10W 205 1660 4682 Capacitor - 6800pF 50V 1608
70
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
206 1660 6103 Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V
207 1660 8104 Capacitor - 0.1µF+80-20% 25V
208 1907 0022 SDRAM 64M 1MX16X4 133Mhz G1
71
24.Decal And Documents (B125)
72
24.Decal And Documents (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 AA00 0225 Decal:High Temperature:120C 1
2 AA00 0226 Decal:Warning:High Temperature 1
3 AA00 3209 Decal - Misfeed Removal Exit 1
4 AA00 3210 Decal - Grip 1
5 B125 1265 Decal:High Temperature:Multi 1
6 B125 1266 Decal:High Temperature:Vertical 1
7 B125 1268 Decal:High Temperature:Side 1
8 B125 3662 Decal:Toner Recycling 1
9 B125 4833 Decal:Emblem:EXP (CHN) 1
10 B125 4881 Decal:Toner Supply 1
11 B125 4885 Decal:Original:Operate:NA 1
11 B125 4925 Decal:Original:Operate:CHN 1
12 B125 4888 Decal:Lever:Switching:NA 1
13 B125 1262 Decal:Main Switch:NA 1
13 B125 1263 Decal:Main Switch (EU/CHN) 1
14 B125 4887 Decal:Switch:Stop:NA 1
14 B125 4889 Decal:Switch:Stop:CHN 1
15 AA00 1389 Large Decal - Energy Star 1
73
25.Special Tools (B125)
74
25.Special Tools (B125)
Index Q’ty Per Index Q’ty Per
Part No. Description Part No. Description
No. Assembly No. Assembly
1 5203 9501 Grease 501 1
2 A023 9504 Test Chart OS-A-1 (2 Sheets / Set) 1
3 A257 9300 Grease - Barrierta S552R 1
75
Parts Index
PM Parts Index
Q’ty Per Page and
Section Name Part No. Description in Service Manual Description in Parts Catalog Assembly Index No.
Drum Section (B125) A165 3581 Cleaning Blade Cleaning Blade 1 23 - 37
Charge & Transfer Unit (B125) AD02 0059 Transfer Corona Wire Corona Wire - Main 1 27 - 7
AD02 0072 Separation Corona Wire Corona Wire - Separation 1 27 - 8
AD02 0089 Charge Corona Wire Charge Corona Wire - G 1 27 - 19
B125 2061 Corona Wire Cleaner Cleaner:Charge Corona 1 27 - 23
Fusing Unit 1 (B125) AE03 1056 Hot Roller Bushings Bushing - Fusing 2 31 - 7
AE01 1085 Hot Roller Hot Roller - Mm50 1 31 - 13
AE02 0148 Pressure Roller Pressure Roller:Mm55 1 31 - 17
AE04 2047 Fusing Cleaning Roller Fusing Cleaning Roller 1 31 - 30
Electrical Section 2 (B125) AA01 0117 Ozone Filter Exhaust Ozone Filter 1 43 - 7
78
Parts Index
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
B125 1003 Exhaust Duct 47 - 24 B125 1186 Gasket:Tray:IPU/MCU:Upper 41 - 20
B125 1056 Stand 47 - 15 B125 1186 Gasket:Tray:IPU/MCU:Upper 41 - 14
B125 1057 Cove:Harness Clamp 43 - 23 B125 1190 Insulating Sheet:IPU/MCU 41 - 10
B125 1084 Bracket:Latch:Right 45 - 20 B125 1191 Holder:C/T Box 41 - 16
B125 1085 Lever:Micro Switch 45 - 19 B125 1194 Seal:Fan:MCU/IPU 41 - 12
B125 1086 Gas Spring 47 - 12 B125 1259 Cover:Control Unit 9- 8
B125 1087 Shaft:Gas Spring:Upper 47 - 13 B125 1261 Bracket:Cover:Lower 47 - 26
B125 1088 Anchor:Gas Spring 47 - 14 B125 1261 Bracket:Cover:Lower 39 - 34
B125 1091 Bracket:Contact Point:Outer:Left 47 - 8 B125 1262 Decal:Main Switch:NA 7- 26
B125 1092 Bracket:Contact Point:Outer:Right 47 - 9 B125 1262 Decal:Main Switch:NA 73 - 13
B125 1093 Bracket:Contact Point:Inner:Left 47 - 10 B125 1263 Decal:Main Switch (EU/CHN) 7- 26
B125 1094 Bracket:Contact Point:Inner:Right 47 - 11 B125 1263 Decal:Main Switch (EU/CHN) 73 - 13
B125 1095 Lever:Machine Or Copier:Left 47 - 3 B125 1264 Bracket:Cover:Lower:2 41 - 5
B125 1096 Lever:Machine Or Copier:Right 47 - 4 B125 1264 Bracket:Cover:Lower:2 47 - 25
B125 1097 Knob:Lever 47 - 1 B125 1265 Decal:High Temperature:Multi 7- 12
B125 1100 Pin:Hinge 47 - 7 B125 1265 Decal:High Temperature:Multi 73 - 5
B125 1101 Side Plate:Drive 39 - 30 B125 1266 Decal:High Temperature:Vertical 45 - 15
B125 1116 Bracket:Dcmotor 21 - 4 B125 1266 Decal:High Temperature:Vertical 73 - 6
B125 1123 Drum Stay:Drive 39 - 1 B125 1267 Sheet:Lgd 47 - 27
B125 1125 Tightener:Development 39 - 22 B125 1268 Decal:High Temperature:Side 73 - 7
B125 1130 Tightener:Registration 39 - 28 B125 1268 Decal:High Temperature:Side 9- 9
B125 1136 Tightener:Fusing 39 - 4 B125 1269 Sheet:Fusing:Small 33 - 15
B125 1141 Tightener:Drum 23 - 1 B125 1271 Sheet:Fusing:Large 33 - 16
B125 1146 Arm:Coupling:Development 39 - 16 B125 1283 Cover:Right Upper 7- 13
B125 1147 Shaft:Coupling:Development 39 - 17 B125 1284 Cover:Rear Lower 9- 10
B125 1156 Cover:PCB 21 - 13 B125 1286 Cover:Left Upper 7- 10
B125 1161 Bracket:Fix:Fusing Unit:Right 47 - 22 B125 1287 Cover:Left Lower 7- 11
B125 1162 Bracket:Fix:Fusing Unit:Left 47 - 21 B125 1288 Cover:Right Lower 7- 14
B125 1168 Cover:Printed Circuit Board 41 - 4 B125 1350 Copy Tray:Upper 7- 17
B125 1169 Insulating Sheet:Cable 41 - 3 B125 1351 Guide:Original:Middle 7- 19
B125 1170 Bracket:Power Supply Cord 43 - 21 B125 1352 Guide Rod 7- 18
B125 1171 Bracket:Power Pack 43 - 16 B125 1353 Guide:Original 7- 15
B125 1180 Base:PCB 41 - 11 B125 1354 Guide Plate:Guide:Original 7- 16
B125 1183 Inner Duct Shield 47 - 23 B125 1355 Guide Plate:Brush 7- 21
B125 1185 Gasket:Registration Guide 19 - 8 B125 1458 Keytop - Ini 11 - 6
79
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
B125 1462 LCD Bracket 11 - 3 B125 2130 Shielding Plate:Charge Corona 29 - 28
B125 1464 Sheet - PCB 11 - 24 B125 2253 Holder:Ball Bearing 23 - 6
B125 1466 Keytop - LCD 11 - 8 B125 2469 C-ring:Drum Shaft 23 - 15
B125 1467 Keytop - Menu 11 - 7 B125 2506 Guide Plate:Lower 19 - 3
B125 1468 Lens:Data:In 11 - 5 B125 2572 Guide Plate:Manual Feed 19 - 6
B125 1471 Cover:Operation Panel:Inner 9- 6 B125 2575 Guide Plate:Registration:Upper 19 - 9
B125 1473 Sheet:Operation Panel 9- 7 B125 2579 Feeler:Registration Sensor 19 - 22
B125 1474 Rivet:MM5 7- 22 B125 2580 Holder:Feeler 19 - 23
B125 1484 Operation Sub-unit:NA 11 - 1 B125 2581 Bracket:Sensor 19 - 16
B125 1485 Operation Sub-unit:EU 11 - 1 B125 2582 Bracket:Positioning:Left 25 - 19
B125 1486 Operation Sub-unit:CHN 11 - 1 B125 2583 Bracket:Positioning:Right 25 - 20
B125 1490 PCB OPU-NP 11 - 2 B125 2584 Middle Manual - Feed Sheet 19 - 5
B125 1500 Keytop:Copy:Reserve:NA 11 - 18 B125 2585 Left And Right Manual - Feed Sheet 19 - 4
B125 1501 Sheet:Menu:NA 11 - 22 B125 2590 Cover:Lower Front 9- 1
B125 1502 Sheet:LCD:NA 11 - 21 B125 2594 Table:Manual Feed 7- 3
B125 1510 Keytop:Copy:Reserve (EU/CHN) 11 - 18 B125 3003 Development Unit:EXP 25 - 1
B125 1511 Sheet:LCD (EU/CHN) 11 - 21 B125 3205 Stay:Toner Hopper 25 - 11
B125 1520 Sheet:Menu:CHN 11 - 22 B125 3213 Electrode Plate:Development 25 - 24
B125 1649 Contact Image Sensor Unit 15 - 14 B125 3227 Bearing Case 25 - 8
B125 1727 Spring Plate:Exposure Glass:Right 15 - 12 B125 3551 Side Plate:Right 23 - 39
B125 1728 Spring Plate:Exposure Glass:Left 15 - 11 B125 3554 Shutter:Discharge Used Toner 23 - 42
B125 1858 LED Head Unit 21 - 18 B125 3555 Side Plate:Left 23 - 7
B125 1971 Plate:Shaft 21 - 8 B125 3563 Casing:Cleaning 23 - 35
B125 2018 Terminal:Grid:Right 27 - 25 B125 3567 Casing:Pickoff Pawl:Welding 23 - 27
B125 2041 Discharge Lamp:Unit 29 - 4 B125 3655 Cushion:Collection Bottle:Front:2 9- 11
B125 2060 Cleaner:Slider 27 - 22 B125 3656 Cushion:Collection Bottle:Front:1 9- 22
B125 2061 Cleaner:Charge Corona 27 - 23 B125 3658 Cushion:Collection Bottle:Rear 9- 12
B125 2070 Bracket 29 - 13 B125 3659 Cushion:Swivel:Stopper 45 - 1
B125 2085 Tension Spring:4291mn 29 - 11 B125 3661 Collection Bottle:Used Toner 9- 16
B125 2106 Spring Plate:Earth 29 - 18 B125 3662 Decal:Toner Recycling 9- 17
B125 2113 Holder:Wire 29 - 26 B125 3662 Decal:Toner Recycling 73 - 8
B125 2124 Spring Plate:Charge Corona:Left 29 - 17 B125 3668 Shield:Used Toner Sensor 9- 23
B125 2125 Guard:Spring Plate:Left 29 - 16 B125 3669 Holder:Used Toner Sensor 9- 20
B125 2127 Spring Plate:Charge Corona:Right 29 - 19 B125 3671 Vibrating Plate:Collection Bottle 45 - 2
B125 2128 Guard:Spring Plate:Right 29 - 20 B125 3672 Bracket:Swivel:Collection Bottle 45 - 5
80
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
B125 3674 Cam:Gear:Swivel 45 - 3 B125 4214 Lever:Cleaning Roller:Left 31 - 28
B125 3679 Bracket:Roller:Collection Bottle 47 - 30 B125 4215 Heat Insulation:Cover:Fusing 31 - 25
B125 3681 Joint:Collection Bottle 45 - 18 B125 4282 Cover:Fusing:Upper 43 - 2
B125 3683 Shield:Joint:Upper 45 - 17 B125 4283 Duct:Louver 43 - 12
B125 3687 Spring Washer:WW-6012 45 - 23 B125 4285 Seal:Cover:Fusing:Harness 43 - 5
B125 3688 Leaf Spring:Collection Bottlee 9- 15 B125 4291 Guide Plate:Duct 43 - 9
B125 3830 T/S Corona Unit 27 - 1 B125 4292 Shield:Front:Guide Plate:Duct 43 - 10
B125 3855 Sheet:Entrance:Transfer 27 - 2 B125 4293 Fan Motor:DC24V 8.5W 43 - 8
B125 3864 Leaf Spring:T/S Corona 45 - 7 B125 4343 Cam:Pressure Release:Fusing:Right 47 - 6
B125 3865 Guide Plate:Transport 45 - 14 B125 4344 Cam:Pressure Release:Fusing:Left 47 - 5
B125 3868 Shielding Plate:Harness 27 - 13 B125 4351 Bracket:Roller 47 - 36
B125 3869 Guide Plate:T/S Corona:Lower 45 - 8 B125 4352 Guide:Bracket:Roller 47 - 34
B125 3871 Grounding Plate:T/S Corona:Mid 45 - 9 B125 4353 Ground Plate:Exhaust 47 - 16
B125 3872 Cover:Transfer Corona:Lower 45 - 10 B125 4356 Cover:Safety Switch 45 - 16
B125 3873 Guard:Leaf Spring 41 - 2 B125 4358 Grounding Plate:Fusing 41 - 1
B125 3873 Guard:Leaf Spring 45 - 11 B125 4358 Grounding Plate:Fusing 43 - 22
B125 4001 Fusing Unit:120V 31 - 1 B125 4359 Roller:Separation:Small 47 - 37
B125 4002 Fusing Unit:220/240V 31 - 1 B125 4450 Paper Exit Unit 37 - 1
B125 4130 C-ring:MM50 31 - 5 B125 4451 Cover:Exit 37 - 7
B125 4135 Bracket:Heater:Right 31 - 33 B125 4452 Leaf Spring:Exit Roller:Upper 37 - 9
B125 4136 Bracket:Heater:Left 31 - 9 B125 4453 Leaf Spring:Exit Roller:Lower 37 - 10
B125 4137 Cover:Heater 31 - 8 B125 4455 Bracket:Lock:Exit:Right 37 - 3
B125 4145 Shaft:Pressure Roller 31 - 18 B125 4456 Positioning Plate:Exit 37 - 4
B125 4148 Holder:Pressure Roller 31 - 14 B125 4458 Guide Plate:Exit 37 - 16
B125 4151 Stay:Fusing:Upper 33 - 6 B125 4460 Bracket:Lock:Exit:Left 37 - 11
B125 4156 Electrode Plate:Thermostat 33 - 4 B125 4462 Stay:Exit 37 - 24
B125 4162 Bracket:Thermistor 33 - 17 B125 4463 DC Solenoid:Gate Pawl 37 - 22
B125 4172 Lever:Pressure 31 - 3 B125 4464 Gasket:Guide Plate:Exit 37 - 26
B125 4173 Lever:Pressure Release:Lower 31 - 11 B125 4469 Fusing/Paper Exit Unit:EXP 35 - 1
B125 4174 Shaft:Lever:Pressure Release 33 - 2 B125 4475 Guide:Fusing/Paper Exit Unit 35 - 16
B125 4185 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate:Ass'y 33 - 12 B125 4477 Guide:Fusing/Paper Exit:Middle 35 - 11
B125 4194 Guide Plate:Fusing Exit:Lower 31 - 19 B125 4478 Exit Roller:Drive:Lower 35 - 12
B125 4195 Guide:Auxiliary:Fusing Exit 31 - 20 B125 4480 Exit Roller:Drive:Upper 35 - 7
B125 4211 Fusing Cover:Upper 31 - 24 B125 4488 Arm:Drive:Fusing/Exit Unit 35 - 23
B125 4213 Lever:Cleaning Roller:Right 31 - 32 B125 4497 Seal:Guide:Left Upper 35 - 14
81
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
B125 4498 Seal:Guide:Right Upper 35 - 13 B125 4806 Sheet:Cover:Toner Cartridge 7- 7
B125 4499 Grip:Exit 35 - 15 B125 4809 Cover:Original:Drive 13 - 3
B125 4613 Bracket:Registration Sensor 17 - 10 B125 4813 Cover:Toner Cartridge 7- 5
B125 4615 Bracket:Original Sensor:Insert 17 - 8 B125 4815 Tensioner:Belt 15 - 7
B125 4616 Bracket:Original:Exit Sensor 15 - 20 B125 4817 Sheet:Magnet Catch 25 - 27
B125 4630 Bracket:Original Sensor (EU/CHN) 17 - 11 B125 4825 Sheet:Block Light:1 13 - 41
B125 4631 Bracket:Original Sensor:NA 17 - 11 B125 4826 Sheet:Block Light:2 13 - 50
B125 4652 Bracket:Set Sensor 17 - 3 B125 4827 Sheet:Block Light:3 13 - 37
B125 4656 Bushing:Arm:Front 17 - 15 B125 4828 Sheet:Block Light:4 13 - 38
B125 4665 Transport Roller:Original Insert 17 - 16 B125 4829 Sheet:Block Light:5 13 - 39
B125 4675 Transport Roller:Original Exhaust 15 - 15 B125 4833 Decal:Emblem:EXP (CHN) 7- 6
B125 4682 Guide Plate:Front Lower:A4 15 - 1 B125 4833 Decal:Emblem:EXP (CHN) 73 - 9
B125 4689 Guide:CIS:Front 15 - 2 B125 4850 Platen Plate 13 - 9
B125 4692 Guide Plate:Front Lower:LT 15 - 1 B125 4852 Case:Spring 13 - 7
B125 4696 Guide Plat:Original:Rear Lower 15 - 16 B125 4853 Plate:Spring 13 - 8
B125 4697 Bushing:Arm:Rear 29 - 23 B125 4854 Cushion:Keytop:Original:Stop 13 - 46
B125 4703 Original Table (EU/CHN) 9- 5 B125 4855 Bracket:Platen Plate 13 - 2
B125 4704 Original Table:Printing:NA 9- 5 B125 4856 Sheet:Guide - Pressure Plate 13 - 53
B125 4720 Side Fence:Left 7- 1 B125 4864 Knob:Pressure Release 13 - 21
B125 4720 Side Fence:Left 9- 3 B125 4866 Bracket:Pressure Release 13 - 23
B125 4723 Side Fence:Right 7- 2 B125 4870 Stand:Pressure Release:Left 13 - 18
B125 4723 Side Fence:Right 9- 4 B125 4871 Stand:Pressure Release:Right 13 - 27
B125 4730 Cover:Original:Upper 13 - 42 B125 4879 Sheet:Shield:Paper Size Sensor 13 - 40
B125 4732 Stopper:Original:Upper 13 - 14 B125 4881 Decal:Toner Supply 73 - 10
B125 4738 Roller:Driven:Original 13 - 34 B125 4881 Decal:Toner Supply 7- 9
B125 4742 Supporting Plate:Cover:Original 13 - 10 B125 4884 Cover:Original:Switch 13 - 44
B125 4751 Shaft:Driven 13 - 36 B125 4885 Decal:Original:Operate:NA 13 - 43
B125 4752 Roller:Driven 13 - 35 B125 4885 Decal:Original:Operate:NA 73 - 11
B125 4753 Grounding Plate:Original:Frontlower 17 - 7 B125 4887 Decal:Switch:Stop:NA 13 - 48
B125 4754 Grounding Plate:Original:Rear Lower 29 - 24 B125 4887 Decal:Switch:Stop:NA 73 - 14
B125 4755 Seal:Shield 29 - 22 B125 4888 Decal:Lever:Switching:NA 73 - 12
B125 4756 Guard:Grounding Plate:Rear 29 - 25 B125 4888 Decal:Lever:Switching:NA 13 - 49
B125 4761 Shaft:Contact Point:Original:Upper 13 - 17 B125 4889 Decal:Switch:Stop:CHN 13 - 48
B125 4767 Keytop:Original:Stop 13 - 47 B125 4889 Decal:Switch:Stop:CHN 73 - 14
B125 4770 Stepper Motor - DC24V 34.8W 29 - 2 B125 4901 Stopper:Open And Close:Left:Unit 13 - 51
82
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
B125 4906 Stopper:Open And Close:Right:Unit 13 - 52 B125 5660 Harness:DC:LVDS:Main 41 - 18
B125 4925 Decal:Original:Operate:CHN 73 - 11 B125 5671 Harness:DC:Original Exit:Connecting 37 - 17
B125 4925 Decal:Original:Operate:CHN 13 - 43 B125 5680 Harness:DC:Operation Sub-unit:Connecting 11 - 20
B125 5219 PCB:Image Processing Unit:EXP 41 - 9 B125 5680 Harness:DC:Operation Sub-unit:Connecting 13 - 12
B125 5219 PCB:Image Processing Unit:EXP 69 - * B125 5681 Harness:DC:Scanner Unit:Connect:NA 17 - 14
B125 5246 PCB:MCU-NP:CHN 41 - 8 B125 5682 Harness:DC:Scanner:Connecting (EU/CHN) 17 - 14
B125 5246 PCB:MCU-NP:CHN 55 - * B125 5683 Ground Wire:Pressure Plate 13 - 5
B125 5250 PCB:SMDB 21 - 9 B125 5686 Harness:DC:Original Sensor:Connect 15 - 18
B125 5291 PCB:MCU-NP:NA 55 - * B125 5688 Grounding Wire:Scanner Unit:1 13 - 4
B125 5291 PCB:MCU-NP:NA 41 - 8 B125 5689 Grounding Wire:Scanner Unit:2 17 - 5
B125 5292 PCB:MCU-NP:EU 41 - 8 B125 5690 Harness:DC:Ql:Connecting 29 - 15
B125 5292 PCB:MCU-NP:EU 55 - * B125 5691 Harness:DC:Scanner Unit:Set Sensor 17 - 4
B125 5425 PCB:VDB:VDIP 21 - 10 B125 5692 Harness:DC:Cleaning:Connecting 23 - 24
B125 5431 IC:VDIP:RB5C619 69 - 4 B125 5693 Harness:Registration:Connecting 19 - 14
B125 5460 PCB:SIB 21 - 11 B125 5699 Harness:DC:Fan:Connecting 43 - 6
B125 5602 Harness:AC:Fusing:Connecting:1 33 - 3 B125 6507 Operating Instructions:System:NA 7- 24
B125 5604 Harness:AC:Main 43 - 17 B125 6607 Operating Instructions:Copy:NA 7- 25
B125 5606 Harness:AC:Fusing:Connect:120V 33 - 11 B125 8503 Operating Instructions:Copy:CHN 7- 25
B125 5607 Harness:AC:Fusing:Connect:220/230V 33 - 11 B125 8504 Operating Instructions:System:CHN 7- 24
B125 5608 Harness:AC:Fusing:120V 43 - 18 B125 9590 Counter:RAM:STK15C88-WF45 41 - 22
B125 5609 Harness:AC:Fusing:220/230V 43 - 18
B125 5612 Harness:High Voltage:Bias 21 - 16
B125 5613 Harness:High Voltage:Grid 21 - 15
B125 5614 Harness:High Voltage:Charge 21 - 17
B125 5616 Harness:High Voltage:Transfer 43 - 13
B125 5617 Harness:High Voltage:Separation 43 - 14
B125 5619 Clamp:Harness:FFC 17 - 17
B125 5619 Clamp:Harness:FFC 17 - 6
B125 5643 Ground Wire:Scanner Unit:3 37 - 13
B125 5649 Harness:DC:Machine Or Copier:Right 41 - 7
B125 5652 Harness:DC:Machine Or Copier:Left 41 - 6
B125 5654 Harness:DC:Operation Panel 41 - 17
B125 5657 Harness:DC:Charge:Connecting:1 29 - 3
B125 5658 Grounding Wire:Paper Exit Unit 37 - 23
B125 5660 Harness:DC:LVDS:Main 21 - 14
83
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
A023 4096 Fusing Lamp Supporter 31 - 10 A232 5350 IC - HG71C103FD 55 - 1
A023 9504 Test Chart OS-A-1 (2 Sheets / Set) 75 - 2 A232 5355 IC - GATEX 55 - 2
A060 3826 Toner Collection Bottle Roller 9- 14 A232 5371 MPU CSS 55 - 3
A060 3827 Roller Holder 9- 13 A250 5741 Power Supply Cord - 120V 43 - 20
A090 5596 LED Grounding Wire 37 - 2 A250 5742 Power Supply Cord - 230V 43 - 20
A134 1195 Seal - Fan Harness 43 - 11 A257 1121 Front Screw 47 - 32
A134 3162 DC Motor - 5.85W 45 - 4 A257 9300 Grease - Barrierta S552R 75 - 3
A163 2052 Left Grid Terminal 27 - 16 A259 1158 Pulley Flange 39 - 9
A163 2251 Drum Knob 23 - 23 A297 5350 IC - TC220C820TB-510 69 - 1
A163 2255 Spacer 23 - 22 A422 1356 Pin - 3x26mm 13 - 13
A163 3101 Filter Bracket 25 - 16 A498 3118 Stepped Screw -M4 23 - 30
A163 3607 Right Pressure Lever 23 - 34 A498 3118 Stepped Screw -M4 15 - 3
A163 3608 Left Pressure Lever 23 - 32 A548 2139 Pulley 39 - 27
A163 3609 Lever Shaft 23 - 33 A571 7665 Screw - M2.6X5 45 - 22
A163 3611 Pick-off Pawl 23 - 29 A666 4170 Stepped Screw - M3x6 17 - 18
A163 4109 C - Ring - 19m 31 - 15 A666 4170 Stepped Screw - M3x6 13 - 1
A163 4122 Entrance Guide Plate Holder 33 - 13 A675 2629 Stepper Motor Cushion 29 - 1
A163 4124 Holder Cam 33 - 14 B004 4087 Plate- Thermistor 33 - 8
A163 4159 Lock Positioning Plate 35 - 2 B010 1359 Operating Instructions Holder 7- 20
A163 4183 Upper Pressure Release Lever 33 - 1 B010 2061 Right Holder - Charge Corona 27 - 28
A163 4231 Arm Stopper 35 - 26 B010 2062 Left Holder - Charge Corona 27 - 27
A163 4235 Tube Holder 35 - 10 B010 2252 OPC Drum Balancer 23 - 19
A163 4236 Exit Tube 35 - 9 B010 2256 Bearing Stopper 23 - 10
A163 4347 Separation Roller 47 - 35 B010 3150 Entrance Seal 25 - 18
A163 4453 Exit Driven Roller 37 - 8 B010 3206 Joint:Toner Hopper:Ass'y 25 - 23
A163 6052 Original Table Bushing 13 - 16 B010 3211 Drum Stay:Spring 25 - 21
A165 3581 Cleaning Blade 23 - 37 B010 3212 Spring:Joint 25 - 22
A174 3931 Guide:Paper:T/S Corona:Middle:Right 27 - 11 B010 3581 Density Sensor Guide Plate 23 - 26
A174 3932 Guide:Paper:T/S Corona:Middle:Left 27 - 10 B010 3582 Blade Release Lever 23 - 31
A174 3937 Right Paper Guide - T/S Outer 27 - 12 B010 4312 Upper Guide 35 - 6
A174 3938 Left Paper Guide - T/S Outer 27 - 9 B010 4324 Idler Gear - 30z 35 - 22
A174 4372 Gate Pawl Drive 37 - 14 B010 4458 Gate Pawl Plate 37 - 19
A222 2680 Torque Limiter 19 - 10 B010 4461 Grounding Wire - Paper Exit Unit 37 - 12
A232 2367 ID Sensor 23 - 25 B010 5225 IC-HDC 69 - 2
A232 4058 Rear Collar - Pressure Lever 47 - 28 B010 5225 IC-HDC 41 - 19
84
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
B010 5355 IC - RF5C689 69 - 3 AA00 0225 Decal:High Temperature:120C 73 - 1
B010 9510 Drum 23 - 18 AA00 0225 Decal:High Temperature:120C 47 - 20
B027 1433 Keytop - Start 11 - 11 AA00 0226 Decal:Warning:High Temperature 73 - 2
B027 1434 Keytop - Clear/Stop 11 - 10 AA00 0226 Decal:Warning:High Temperature 35 - 5
B027 1435 Keytop - Try Print 11 - 12 AA00 0235 Decal:Warning:High Temperature 35 - 27
B027 1436 Keytop - Main Switch 11 - 17 AA00 1389 Large Decal - Energy Star 7- 8
B027 1437 Keytop - 10key (EU/CHN) 11 - 9 AA00 1389 Large Decal - Energy Star 73 - 15
B027 1438 Keytop - Interrupt 11 - 16 AA00 3209 Decal - Misfeed Removal Exit 73 - 3
B027 1439 Keytop - Preheat 11 - 15 AA00 3209 Decal - Misfeed Removal Exit 43 - 3
B027 1441 Keytop - Block Diagram 11 - 13 AA00 3210 Decal - Grip 73 - 4
B027 1449 Keytop - Left Blank 11 - 19 AA00 3210 Decal - Grip 43 - 4
B027 7161 Keytop - 10 Key (NA) 11 - 9 AA00 3210 Decal - Grip 37 - 25
B027 7162 Keytop - Reset Switch 11 - 14 AA01 0117 Exhaust Ozone Filter 43 - 7
B027 7164 Sheet - Power Source Display (NA) 11 - 23 AA01 2081 Development Filter 25 - 17
B027 7184 Sheet - Power Source Display (EU/CHN) 11 - 23 AA04 3527 Timing Belt - 230XL 35 - 25
B065 1374 Cloth - DF Exposure Glass 7- 23 AA04 3588 Timing Belt - B60S2M480 15 - 10
B104 4085 Thermostat Housing 33 - 5 AA04 3643 Timing Belt - B100S2M264 39 - 25
B104 5999 Gasket:STG10-10:20mm 45 - 24 AA04 3644 Timing Belt - B60S2M214 39 - 14
B624 2530 Spacer:Pressure Plate:Front 39 - 35 AA04 3911 Timing Belt - S3M420 39 - 7
G020 4444 Tightener 39 - 21 AA04 3922 Timing Belt - 426S2M 23 - 5
G020 4472 Paper Feed Sensor 19 - 15 AA05 0101 Spring 37 - 21
G568 2839 Tightener - M16 15 - 4 AA05 0113 Wire:Cleaner 29 - 10
G568 2839 Tightener - M16 23 - 3 AA06 0092 Release Spring 39 - 3
G568 2839 Tightener - M16 39 - 5 AA06 0117 Spring 39 - 18
H004 3755 Square Bushing 17 - 12 AA06 0244 Spring 39 - 23
H004 3755 Square Bushing 13 - 11 AA06 0386 Pressure Spring 37 - 6
H041 1549 Trast Screw 31 - 27 AA06 0456 Fusing Cover Spring 47 - 2
H072 2207 Guard (NA) 17 - 13 AA06 0607 Pressure Spring 31 - 4
H072 2207 Guard (EU/CHN) 17 - 13 AA06 0749 Spring 27 - 17
H072 2207 Guard 13 - 19 AA06 0750 Spring 27 - 21
H072 2207 Guard 21 - 7 AA06 0750 Spring 29 - 27
H072 2207 Guard 9- 21 AA06 0942 Pressure Roller Pickoff Pawl Spring 31 - 22
H072 2207 Guard 47 - 33 AA06 0943 Belt Tensioner Spring 15 - 6
H310 5010 LCD 11 - 4 AA06 2325 Cleaning Blade Spring 23 - 38
AA06 3276 Pressure Spring 23 - 21
85
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
AA06 3277 Middle Plate Spring 19 - 18 AA14 3771 Shoulder Screw - M3 47 - 19
AA06 3415 Original Stopper Spring 13 - 15 AA14 3786 Stepped Screw:M3x10.3 29 - 5
AA06 3416 Spring - 3.4n 13 - 28 AA14 3787 Stepped Screw:M3x14.2 29 - 6
AA06 3417 Spring - 1.7n 13 - 31 AA14 5830 Swing Unit Idler Shaft 45 - 6
AA06 3418 Spring - 6.6n 13 - 30 AA15 2381 Ozone Filter Upper Seal 41 - 21
AA06 3419 Spring - 10n 13 - 6 AA15 2390 Shealding Seal 47 - 17
AA06 3900 Registration Compression Spring 19 - 11 AA15 3133 Blade Right Shield 23 - 40
AA06 6052 Stripper Spring 35 - 17 AA15 3134 Blade Left Shield 23 - 9
AA06 6254 Corona Wire Spring 27 - 4 AA15 3135 Drum Right Shield 23 - 8
AA06 6255 Feeler Spring 19 - 21 AA15 3450 Right Shield - Side Plate 25 - 15
AA06 6256 Right Lock Spring 35 - 4 AA15 3451 Left Shield - Side Plate 25 - 14
AA06 6257 Left Lock Spring 35 - 3 AB01 0363 Gear - 146Z 23 - 16
AA06 6370 Left Pressure Release Spring - 5n 13 - 24 AB01 0364 Gear - 46Z 23 - 12
AA06 6371 Right Pressure Release Spring - 5n 13 - 26 AB01 3920 Gear - 30Z 25 - 2
AA06 6643 Arm Spring 35 - 21 AB01 3921 Gear - 20Z 25 - 4
AA06 6664 Toner Outlet Shutter Spring 23 - 41 AB01 3922 Gear - 28Z 25 - 7
AA08 2101 Bushing - 6x10x6 37 - 15 AB01 3924 Gear - 28Z 25 - 9
AA08 2101 Bushing - 6x10x6 35 - 19 AB01 4263 Gear - 50Z 39 - 19
AA08 2104 Bushing - 8x12x7 19 - 2 AB01 4265 Gear - 28Z 39 - 15
AA08 2135 Bushing - Dia4 13 - 29 AB01 4267 Gear - 46Z 39 - 20
AA08 2135 Bushing - Dia4 19 - 12 AB01 4268 Gear:Drive:Fusing 31 - 6
AA08 3016 Roller Clutch - 6x14x10 31 - 31 AB01 7347 Idle Gear 45 - 21
AA12 0087 Fusing Discharge Brush 31 - 34 AB01 7378 Coupled Gear - 28/24Z 25 - 6
AA12 0125 Front Discharge Brush 15 - 17 AB01 7664 Gear:Pulley:Right 29 - 9
AA13 2013 Spacer 21 - 1 AB01 7667 Timing Pulley - 18Z/66T 39 - 26
AA13 2058 Spacer - 8.1x10 23 - 14 AB01 7669 Gear - 62/30Z 39 - 24
AA13 2097 Spacer 25 - 26 AB01 7671 Gear/Pulley - 32Z/70T 39 - 13
AA14 0844 Shaft:Exit Roller 35 - 8 AB01 7672 Gear - 19/120Z 39 - 12
AA14 3120 Stepped Screw - M3x3 13 - 25 AB01 7673 Gear - 40/82Z 39 - 11
AA14 3139 Shoulder Screw - Pressure Arm 21 - 6 AB01 7674 Gear/Pulley - 66Z/20T 39 - 10
AA14 3335 Rear Shutter Pin 23 - 13 AB01 7675 Gear/Pulley - 30Z/63T 39 - 8
AA14 3347 Lever Stopper Shaft 47 - 29 AB01 7676 Gear - 32/100Z 21 - 2
AA14 3394 Stepped Screw - M3x10 13 - 20 AB01 7677 Gear/Pulley - 100Z/29T 21 - 3
AA14 3404 Stepped Screw - M4 47 - 18 AB01 7680 Gear/Pulley - 24Z/24T 35 - 24
AA14 3719 Development Unit Shaft 25 - 28 AB03 0474 Pulley - 24T 35 - 20
86
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
AB03 0745 Pulley - 76T 15 - 8 AW01 0091 Photo Reflection Sensor 31 - 26
AB03 0746 Pulley - 76T 17 - 1 AW01 0093 Photo Reflection Sensor - PS-17ND1 15 - 19
AB03 0764 Pulley - 102T 23 - 4 AW01 0093 Photo Reflection Sensor - PS-17ND1 17 - 9
AB03 2723 Pulley:Left 29 - 7 AW02 0056 Photointerruptor - EE-SX4235A-P1 37 - 18
AB03 2724 Pulley:Encoder 29 - 8 AW02 0075 Photointerruptor 29 - 12
AC01 0006 Exposure Glass 15 - 13 AW02 0075 Photointerruptor 45 - 12
AD00 4103 Charge Corona Unit 27 - 14 AW02 0119 Photointerruptor - LG-248l1 19 - 17
AD01 4030 Drum Flange 23 - 20 AW02 0119 Photointerruptor - LG-248l1 39 - 6
AD01 5038 Shaft:Drum 23 - 17 AW10 0053 Thermistor - Rear 33 - 18
AD02 0059 Corona Wire - Main 27 - 7 AW10 0087 Fusing Thermistor 33 - 7
AD02 0072 Corona Wire - Separation 27 - 8 AW11 0035 Thermostat:199C 250V/10A 33 - 10
AD02 0089 Charge Corona Wire - G 27 - 19 AW11 0036 Thermostat:200C 250V/10A 33 - 9
AD02 0090 Grid Wire 27 - 20 AW50 0022 Push Switch 13 - 45
AD02 2316 Left End Block - Charge 27 - 15 AX04 0061 Cleaner Motor - DC 0.5W 29 - 21
AD02 2317 Left End Block Cover - Charge 27 - 18 AX06 0262 Brushless Motor DC 24W 21 - 5
AD02 2320 End Block Cover - T & S 27 - 3 AX06 0262 Brushless Motor DC 24W 39 - 31
AD02 2369 End Block Cover - Charge Corona 27 - 26 AX06 0271 Brushless Motor - DC24V/45W 39 - 33
AD02 2370 End Block: Chage Right 27 - 24 AX10 0026 DC Solenoid - Pick-off Pawl 23 - 28
AD02 2372 End Block:T/S Corona:Right 27 - 6 AX20 0115 Spring Clutch 25 - 12
AD02 2373 End Block:T/S Corona:Left 27 - 5 AX21 0079 Magnetic Clutch 39 - 32
AD04 3085 Toner Collection Coil:Cleaning 23 - 36 AX31 0043 Total Counter 41 - 15
AE01 1085 Hot Roller - MM50 31 - 13 AX40 0127 Heater - 120V 13W 45 - 13
AE02 0148 Pressure Roller:MM55 31 - 17 AX40 0128 Heater - 230V 13W 45 - 13
AE03 0041 Ball Bearing -20x32x7 31 - 16 AX45 0042 Heater:120V:1150W 31 - 12
AE03 1056 Bushing - Fusing 31 - 7 AX45 0043 Heater:230V:1150W 31 - 12
AE04 2047 Fusing Cleaning Roller 31 - 30 AX50 0074 Discharge Lamp P2 29 - 14
AE04 4054 Stripper Pawls 35 - 18 AX64 0124 Fan Motor - DC3.36W 41 - 13
AE04 4055 Pressure Roller Pickoff Pawl 31 - 21 AZ00 0075 Power Supply Coard (CHN) 43 - 20
AF02 0599 Registration Roller 19 - 7 AZ23 0129 Power Supply Unit 100-120V DOM/NA 43 - 19
AF02 0603 Middle Driven Roller 19 - 20 AZ23 0130 Power Supply Unit:220-240:EU/AA/CHN 43 - 19
AF02 2128 Transport Driven Roller 19 - 13 AZ32 0128 Power Pack:TD 43 - 15
AF02 2156 Front Driven Transport Roller 13 - 32 AZ32 0135 Power Pack:CGB 21 - 12
AF02 2157 Rear Driven Transport Roller 13 - 33 GA06 0003 Spring:Guide Plate 23 - 2
AF02 5029 Exit Separation Pawl 37 - 20
AG07 0014 Magnet Catch 7- 4
87
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
0252 0020B Philips Pan Head Screw - M2x2 29 -110 0451 3008H Tapping Screw - M3x8 39 -102
0313 0050B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3x5 27 -103 0451 3008H Tapping Screw - M3x8 7 -101
0314 0100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M4x10 43 -101 0451 3008H Tapping Screw - M3x8 9 -105
0315 0100B Philips Pan Head Screw - M5x10 25 -110 0451 3010B Tapping Screw - M3x10 25 -108
0353 0040B Screw - M3X4 37 -103 0451 3012B Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x12 9 -106
0353 0060B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3x6 11 -101 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14 21 -104
0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 27 -102 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14 31 -103
0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 35 -102 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14 29 -109
0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 37 -101 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14 17 -103
0450 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 13 -105 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14 15 -103
0450 3010B Tapping Screw - M3x10 9 -103 0451 3014B Tapping Screw - M3-14 45 -103
0450 4008B Tapping Screw - 4x8 13 -106 0451 3025B Tapping Screw - M3x25 45 -104
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 37 -102 0451 3030B Tapping Screw - 3x30 41 -102
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 15 -102 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 37 -105
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 17 -102 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 25 -106
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 23 -101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 35 -101
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 41 -101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 39 -104
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 39 -101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 27 -104
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 19 -101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 31 -104
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 45 -101 0451 4006B Tapping Screw - 4x6 15 -101
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 47 -101 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8 33 -105
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 21 -101 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8 39 -103
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 43 -102 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8 21 -113
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 33 -104 0451 4008B Philips Tapping Screw - M4x8 23 -103
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 31 -102 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10 9 -107
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 7 -102 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10 23 -104
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 11 -103 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10 29 -101
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 9 -104 0451 4010B Tapping Screw - 4x10 25 -107
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 13 -103 0451 4016B Tapping Screw - M4-16 13 -104
0451 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 29 -102 0452 3006B Tapping Screw - M3x6 9 -102
0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 13 -102 0452 3010H Tapping Screw - M3x10 11 -102
0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 21 -102 0453 3008H Binding Self Tapping Screw - M3x8 7 -103
0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 33 -106 0574 0050E Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M4x5 15 -104
0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 27 -105 0574 0060E Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M4x6 23 -105
0451 3008B Tapping Screw - M3x8 23 -102 0633 0200G Pin - M3x20 25 -103
88
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
0707 6200B Bushing - Dia6x20 47 -115 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 9 -101
0708 0040Z Flat Washer-M4 29 -106 0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 41 -103
0720 0020E Retaining Ring - M2 13 -107 0802 5285 Screw - 3x8 43 -103
0720 0030E Retaining Ring - M3 13 -112 0802 5292 Tapping Screw:Round Point:M3X8 21 -103
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 35 -103 0805 0089 Retaining Ring - M4 35 -105
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 33 -107 0805 3385 Bushing - 6mm 35 -104
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 45 -107 0805 3471 Bushing - M8x22x7 23 -107
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 19 -105 0805 3516 Ball Bearing - 10x26x8 25 -104
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 39 -105 0805 3517 Ball Bearing - 8x16x5 25 -105
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 37 -104 0951 3006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer-M3x6 27 -101
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 47 -104 0951 3006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer-M3x6 15 -110
0720 0040E Retaining Ring - M4 23 -106 0954 3006M Screw - M3x6 33 -101
0720 0050E Retaining Ring - M5 25 -102 0954 3006M Screw - M3x6 31 -101
0720 0050E Retaining Ring - M5 47 -103 0954 3008N Screw - M3x8 33 -102
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 15 -109 0954 3012N Screw - M3x12 33 -103
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 47 -102 0965 5016B Tapping Screw W/h Flat Washer-M5x16 47 -105
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 19 -103 1102 3822 Connector - 20P 55 -101
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 17 -104 1102 4201 Connector - 2P 55 -102
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 39 -106 1102 4211 CT Header - 12P 55 -103
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 21 -111 1102 5007 CT Header - 14P 55 -104
0720 0060E Retaining Ring - M6 25 -101 1102 5303 Connector - 4P 69 -101
0720 0080E Retaining Ring - M8 47 -106 1102 5305 Connector - 6P 55 -105
0733 0406 Bushing - 4x6 13 -111 1102 5344 Connector - 16P 55 -106
0800 0084 Philips Pan Head Screw - M2.3x12 19 -102 1102 5411 Connector - 24P 55 -107
0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer 9 -108 1102 5476 Modular Cord - 6p/6p 55 -108
0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer 19 -106 1102 5477 Modular Cord - 6p/4p 55 -109
0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer 39 -109 1102 5944 Connector - 3P 55 -110
0801 1179 Philips Screw With Toothed Washer 47 -108 1102 6245 Relay Connector - 2P 29 -107
0802 5220 Tapping Screw - M4x8 47 -107 1102 6297 Connector - 4P 55 -237
0802 5220 Tapping Screw - M4x8 43 -104 1102 6298 Connector - 5P 55 -111
0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 13 -101 1102 6299 Connector - 6P 55 -112
0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 27 -106 1102 6301 Connector - 8P 55 -113
0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 45 -102 1102 6304 Connector - 11P 55 -114
0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 21 -116 1102 6395 Connector - 1P 69 -102
0802 5276 Tapping Screw With Washer - M3x6 17 -101 1102 6396 Connector - 1P 55 -115
89
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
1102 6396 Connector - 1P 69 -103 1105 0489 Harness Clamp - LWS 1316 29 -104
1102 6397 Box Header 55 -116 1105 0489 Harness Clamp - LWS 1316 47 -110
1102 6515 Connector - 34P 55 -117 1105 0490 Harness Clamp - IWS-2218 47 -117
1102 6789 Connector - 100P 55 -118 1105 0490 Harness Clamp - IWS-2218 41 -106
1102 6790 Conector - 100R-LT-N1 69 -104 1105 0490 Harness Clamp - IWS-2218 43 -107
1102 7834 Connector - B2B 55 -119 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 19 -104
1102 8090 Connector - TX25-30P-12ST-N1 69 -105 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 23 -108
1102 8091 Connector - 53505-4010 69 -106 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 17 -107
1102 8242 Connector:53375-0710 55 -120 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 39 -107
1102 8466 Connector:55447-0210 55 -121 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 37 -107
1102 8471 Connector - 55447-071 55 -122 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 47 -109
1102 8490 Connector:55451-3210 55 -123 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 15 -105
1102 8494 Connector - 55451-4010 55 -124 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 29 -103
1102 8515 Connector:DX20M-68S 69 -107 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 41 -108
1102 8661 Connector - FCN-564P068-G/SC-4V 55 -125 1105 0511 Harness Clamp - LWS-0306ZC 43 -105
1102 9083 Connector:53375-1110 55 -126 1105 0516 Clamp 21 -109
1104 0588 DIP Socket - 28p 55 -127 1105 0516 Clamp 17 -108
1104 0597 IC Socket - 64p - SN 69 -108 1105 0516 Clamp 15 -111
1104 0683 Socket - IMSA-9206H-GF 55 -128 1105 0516 Clamp 13 -109
1104 0771 IC Socket - 28PIN 55 -129 1105 0516 Clamp 35 -106
1105 0042 Wire Band 25 -109 1105 0516 Clamp 39 -112
1105 0160 Clamp 21 -106 1105 0516 Clamp 47 -111
1105 0160 Clamp 43 -109 1105 0516 Clamp 43 -123
1105 0290 Harness Clamp - Horizontal 33 -108 1105 0517 Harness Clamp - LWS-2111Z 43 -108
1105 0328 Harness Clamp - ES-0505 37 -106 1105 0517 Harness Clamp - LWS-2111Z 47 -116
1105 0348 Clamp 29 -105 1105 0518 Edge Saddle - LES-1010 13 -108
1105 0348 Clamp 45 -110 1105 0518 Edge Saddle - LES-1010 43 -110
1105 0409 Card Spacer- 6.4mm 39 -111 1105 0518 Edge Saddle - LES-1010 15 -107
1105 0409 Card Spacer- 6.4mm 21 -110 1105 0521 Clamp - LES-1017 47 -113
1105 0487 Harness Clamp 15 -106 1105 0521 Clamp - LES-1017 41 -110
1105 0487 Harness Clamp 13 -110 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510 45 -109
1105 0487 Harness Clamp 43 -106 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510 17 -106
1105 0487 Harness Clamp 45 -108 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510 29 -108
1105 0488 Harness Clamp 41 -109 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510 47 -112
1105 0488 Harness Clamp 21 -108 1105 0522 Edge Saddle - LES0510 39 -108
90
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N 41 -105 1403 0978 LED - SML-310DT 55 -142
1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N 21 -105 1404 0238 Serge Absorber 22V 0.6J 55 -143
1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N 11 -104 1407 1535 IC - TD62308AP 55 -144
1105 0528 Nylon Clamp - EMT-2N 13 -113 1407 2187 TTLIC - SN74LS07NS 55 -145
1105 0529 Nylon Clamp:EMT-3N 41 -104 1407 2231 IC - TD62308AF 55 -146
1105 0531 Locking Support-emss-4s 21 -107 1407 3550 IC TC74HC07AF 55 -147
1106 0200 Bushing - 19.44mm 45 -111 1407 4114 IC - SN751177 55 -148
1106 0411 Bushing - 11.5mm 21 -114 1407 4323 TTL - TD74ABT244F 69 -113
1106 0458 Bushing - 9.9mm 47 -114 1407 4614 IC - TA7291P 55 -149
1107 0629 Fuse Ceramic Case 15A 125V (120V) 43 -121 1407 4773 IC:RTC-4543SA 55 -150
1107 0932 Fuse:T10AH 250VC (120V) 43 -120 1407 4959 IC - MC68334GCFC20 55 -151
1107 1054 Fuse - HT-6.3A-N5 (220V/240V) 43 -120 1407 5090 IC - DS90CF364MTD 69 -114
1107 1054 Fuse - HT-6.3A-N5 (220V/240V) 43 -121 1407 5112 IC - RAM STK15C88-W45 55 -236
1107 1067 Fuse - ET-6.3A 43 -122 1407 5113 IC - RAM STK15C68-PF45 41 -107
1109 0018 Circuit Protector - SMD100 55 -130 1407 5151 IC - MBM29F160TE70TN 55 -152
1109 0020 Circuit Protector:SMD150/33 55 -131 1407 5174 CMOS - SN74LVC04APW 69 -115
1204 2521 Micro Switch 45 -106 1407 5178 IC - ABT245 69 -116
1204 2529 Switch - V-5F912DN 17 -105 1407 5179 IC - ABT374 SOP 69 -117
1204 2529 Switch - V-5F912DN 45 -105 1407 5334 IC - CMOS LOGIC 74LVC244A TSSOP 69 -118
1204 2529 Switch - V-5F912DN 21 -112 1407 5344 IC - SN74LV02APW 55 -153
1204 2533 Switch - AJ76200PZ02 39 -110 1407 5345 IC-SN74LV04APW 55 -154
1206 0054 Lithium Cell - CR2032-1HS 55 -132 1407 5346 IC - SN74LS74ANS 55 -155
1400 0710 Transistor - 2SB1240 55 -133 1407 5347 IC - SN74LV08APW 55 -156
1400 0730 Transistor - 2SD1782K 55 -134 1407 5350 IC - SN74LV00APW 69 -119
1400 0810 Transistor:DTC114EUA 69 -109 1407 5350 IC - SN74LV00APW 55 -157
1400 0822 Transistor - 2SA1900 55 -135 1407 5351 IC - SN74LV14APW 69 -120
1402 1322 Diode Array - DAN202U 55 -136 1407 5351 IC - SN74LV14APW 55 -158
1402 1342 Diode - 1SR154-400 55 -137 1407 5353 IC - SN74LV244APW 69 -121
1402 1343 Diode - RB106L-40 55 -138 1407 5353 IC - SN74LV244APW 55 -159
1402 1365 Diode-RB75LV-40 55 -139 1407 5363 IC - SN74AHCT04PW 55 -160
1402 1515 Diode UDZS6.2B 69 -110 1407 5366 IC - 74LVC08A TSSOP 69 -122
1402 1584 Diode - DAN217U 55 -140 1407 5368 IC - 74LVC245A TSSOP 69 -123
1403 0953 LED - SML-310MT 69 -111 1407 5376 IC - SN74LV32APW 55 -161
1403 0953 LED - SML-310MT 55 -141 1407 5376 IC - SN74LV32APW 69 -124
1403 0978 LED - SML-310DT 69 -112 1407 5392 IC:SN74LV541APW 69 -125
91
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
1407 5394 IC:SN74LV138APW 69 -126 1601 7898 Resistor Array 55 -176
1407 5394 IC:SN74LV138APW 55 -162 1601 7900 Resistor Array - 0 Ω ±5% 69 -147
1407 5457 Clock Generator - W180-51G 55 -163 1601 7959 Resistor 55 -177
1407 5463 IC - SN74LV245APW 69 -127 1601 7959 Resistor 69 -148
1407 5469 IC - SN74LV07APW 55 -164 1601 7960 Resistor Array - 100 Ω ±5% 1/16W 55 -178
1407 5592 CMOS Logic:SN74LV139APW 55 -165 1601 7960 Resistor Array - 100 Ω ±5% 1/16W 69 -149
1407 5703 IC - CD4053BPW 55 -166 1601 7983 Resistor Array:2.2kΩ:±5%:1/16W 55 -179
1407 5705 IC - SN74LVC06APW 69 -128 1604 4728 Capacitor - 100µF ±20% 16V 69 -150
1407 5712 IC:SN74lV07ANS 69 -129 1605 1038 Capacitor:680pf:±10%:50V 69 -151
1407 5713 IC:SN74LV06APW 55 -167 1605 1106 Ceramic Capacitor - 2200 pF ±10% 50V 55 -180
1407 5793 Clock Generator:HD151TS304RP 69 -130 1605 1137 Capacitor - 470pF ±10% 50V 55 -181
1407 6109 Controller:RF5V861-1020 69 -131 1605 1148 Capacitor - 0.1µF +80-20% 50V 55 -182
1407 6237 Clock Generator:MB88154PNF-G-112-E1 69 -132 1605 1161 Capacitor - 0.33µF ±10% 10V 69 -152
1408 0575 IC - M51957BFP 55 -168 1605 1212 Capacitor - 470pF ±10% 50V 69 -153
1408 0875 Transistor-array - TD62382AF 55 -169 1605 1228 Capacitor:0.1µF:±10%:25V 69 -154
1408 1095 IC - BA10324AF 55 -170 1605 1234 Capcitor:4700pf:±10%:50V 69 -155
1408 1401 Series Regulator - TA7808F 55 -171 1605 1250 Capcitor:0.068µF:±10%:10V 69 -156
1408 1454 Series Regulator - LM1085IS-3.3 69 -133 1605 1287 Capacitor - 0.47µF +80-20% 25V 55 -183
1408 1650 Series Regulator:LM1084IS-ADJ 69 -134 1605 1306 Capacitor - 1µF ±10% 10V 69 -157
1503 0899 Crystal Oscilator - 15.936Mhz 69 -135 1605 1355 Ceramic Capacitor:680pf:±10%:50V 69 -158
1503 0902 Crystal Oscilator - 40Mhz 69 -136 1605 1357 Capacitor:10µF:±10%:6.3V 69 -159
1503 1004 Oscilator - 19.6608Mhz 55 -172 1605 1358 Capacitor - 10µF ±10% 10V 69 -160
1503 1151 Crystal Oscilator:33.33Mhz 69 -137 1605 1371 Capacitor:4.7µF:+80-20%:6.3V 69 -161
1503 1152 Crystal Oscilator:20Mhz 69 -138 1607 0663 Ferrite Core - TFC-20-10-10 11 -105
1503 1153 Crystal Oscilator:19.44Mhz 69 -139 1607 0732 Noise Filter - AEF321825-470 55 -184
1601 7752 Resistor Array - 10K Ω ±5% 69 -140 1607 0747 FPC Core - FPC-25-12 15 -108
1601 7757 Resistor 0Ω 69 -141 1607 0747 FPC Core - FPC-25-12 21 -115
1601 7867 Resistor - 33 Ω ±5% 1/16W 69 -142 1607 0861 Filter - BK2125HS101 69 -162
1601 7868 Resister Array - 82 Ω ±5% 1/16W 69 -143 1607 1486 Filter:BLM31PG330SN1B 69 -163
1601 7877 Resistor Array 4.7k Ω ±5% 1/32W 55 -173 1607 1580 Filter:NFR21GD1016802B 55 -185
1601 7886 Resistor Array 3.3k Ω ±5% 1/32W 69 -144 1610 1637 Resistor:1 Ω:±1%:1/2w:3216 55 -186
1601 7886 Resistor Array 3.3k Ω ±5% 1/32W 55 -174 1610 1731 Resistor:24k Ω:±0.5%:1/10W:1608 69 -164
1601 7887 Resistor Array - 10K Ω ±5% 1/32W 55 -175 1630 1161 Resistor - 160Ω ±5% 1/8W 55 -187
1601 7887 Resistor Array - 10K Ω ±5% 1/32W 69 -145 1630 4102 Resistor - 1.0KΩ ±5% 1/16W 69 -165
1601 7898 Resistor Array 69 -146 1634 0000 Resistor - 0 Ω 1/16W 55 -188
92
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
1634 0000 Resistor - 0 Ω 1/16W 69 -166 1650 4223 Resistor - 22KΩ±5%1/10W 69 -179
1640 0471 Capacitor - 470µF ±20% 10V 69 -167 1650 4243 Resistor - 24KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -211
1640 5101 Capacitor - 100µF ±20% 50V 55 -189 1650 4272 Resistor - 2.7KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -212
1640 5470 Capacitor - 47µF ±20% 50V 55 -190 1650 4330 Chip Resistor - 33Ω ±5% 1/10W 55 -213
1640 6102 Capacitor:1000µF:±20%:6.3V 69 -168 1650 4330 Chip Resistor - 33Ω ±5% 1/10W 69 -180
1642 5100 Capacitor - 10µF ±20% 50V 55 -191 1650 4332 Resistor - 3.3KΩ±5%1/10W 69 -181
1642 5109 Capcitor - 1µF - ±20% - 50V 55 -192 1650 4332 Resistor - 3.3KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -214
1642 5220 Capacitor - 22µF ±20% 50V 55 -193 1650 4391 Resistor - 390Ω ±5% 1/10W 55 -215
1642 5330 Capacitor - 33µF ±20% 50V 55 -194 1650 4392 Chip Resistor - 3.9kΩ±5%1/10W 55 -216
1642 6331 Capacitor:330µF:±20%:6.3V 69 -169 1650 4430 Resistor - 43Ω±5%:1/10W 69 -182
1650 2101 Resistor - 100Ω ±5% 1/4W 55 -195 1650 4472 Resistor - 4.7KΩ ±5% 1/10W 55 -217
1650 2121 Resistor:120Ω:±5%:1/4W:3216 55 -196 1650 4472 Resistor - 4.7KΩ ±5% 1/10W 69 -183
1650 2392 Resistor - 3.9KΩ±5% 1/4W 55 -197 1650 4473 Resistor - 47KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -218
1650 4100 Resistor - 10Ω ±5% 1/10W 69 -170 1650 4511 Resistor - 510Ω±5%1/10W 69 -184
1650 4100 Resistor - 10Ω ±5% 1/10W 55 -198 1650 4513 Resistor - 51KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -219
1650 4101 Resistor - 100Ω±5%1/10W 55 -199 1650 4519 Resistor:5.1Ω:±5%:1/10W 69 -185
1650 4101 Resistor - 100Ω±5%1/10W 69 -171 1650 4562 Resistor - 5.6KΩ ±5% 1/10W 69 -186
1650 4102 Resistor - 1KΩ ±5% 1/10W 55 -200 1650 4562 Resistor - 5.6KΩ ±5% 1/10W 55 -220
1650 4102 Resistor - 1KΩ ±5% 1/10W 69 -172 1650 4563 Resistor - 56KΩ±5%1/10W 69 -187
1650 4103 Resistor - 10KΩ ±5% 1/10W 69 -173 1650 4620 Resistor 62Ω ±5% 1/10W 55 -221
1650 4103 Resistor - 10KΩ ±5% 1/10W 55 -201 1650 4620 Resistor 62Ω ±5% 1/10W 69 -188
1650 4104 Resistor - 100KΩ±5%1/10W 69 -174 1650 4680 Resistor - 68Ω±5%1/10W 69 -189
1650 4104 Resistor - 100KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -202 1650 4682 Resistor - 6.8KΩ ±5% 1/10W 69 -190
1650 4121 Resistor - 120Ω±5%1/10W 69 -175 1650 4751 Resistor - 750Ω ±5% 1/10W 55 -222
1650 4121 Resistor - 120Ω±5%1/10W 55 -203 1650 4752 Resistor:7.5kΩ:±5%:1/10W:1608 55 -223
1650 4152 Resistor - 1.5KΩ ±5% 1/10W 69 -176 1650 4820 Resistor - 82Ω ±5% 1/10W 69 -191
1650 4154 Resistor 150kΩ ±5% 1/10W 55 -204 1654 1022 Resistor:10.2kΩ:±1%:1/10W:1608 55 -224
1650 4163 Resistor 16kΩ ±5% 1/10W 1608 55 -205 1654 1100 Resistor - 110Ω±1% 1/10W 69 -192
1650 4181 Resistor - 180Ω±5%1/10W 55 -206 1654 1210 Resistor - 121Ω ±1% 1/10W 69 -193
1650 4202 Resistor - 2KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -207 1654 1500 Resistor - 150Ω±1 %1/10W 69 -194
1650 4203 Resistor - 20KΩ ±5% 1/10W 55 -208 1654 1961 Resistor - 1.96KΩ±1%1/10W 55 -225
1650 4204 Resistor - 200KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -209 1654 2001 Chip Resistor - 2kΩ ±1% 1/10W 69 -195
1650 4220 Chip Resistor - 22Ω ±5% 1/10W 69 -177 1654 3002 Resistor - 30KΩ±1%1/10W 55 -226
1650 4222 Resistor - 2.2KΩ±5%1/10W 69 -178 1654 3831 Resistor - 3.83KΩ ±1% 1/10W 1608 55 -227
1650 4222 Resistor - 2.2KΩ±5%1/10W 55 -210 1654 5109 Resistor:51Ω:±1%:1/10W 69 -196
93
Page and Page and
Part No. Description Part No. Description
Index No. Index No.
1654 5231 Resistor - 5.23KΩ±1%1/10W 55 -228 5053 0223 Bushing - 8mm 15 - 9
1654 5360 Resistor - 536Ω ±1% 1/10W 1608 55 -229 5053 0223 Bushing - 8mm 17 - 2
1654 5609 Resistor:56Ω:±1%:1/10W 69 -197 5053 0447 Bushing - 6mm 31 - 29
1660 0100 Capacitor - 10PF ±0.5pF 50V 69 -198 5203 9501 Grease 501 75 - 1
1660 0100 Capacitor - 10PF ±0.5pF 50V 55 -230 5205 3093 Bushing - 8mm 25 - 25
1660 2151 Capacitor - 150pF ±20% 35V 69 -199 5205 3103 Bushing - 6mm 25 - 5
1660 2221 Capacitor - 220pF +80-20% 50V 55 -231 5206 2686 Snap Ring 23 - 11
1660 2330 Capacitor - 33pF - ±5% - 50V 69 -200 5215 4121 Spring - Oil Blade 39 - 29
1660 2470 Capacitor - 47pF ±5% 50V 55 -232 5215 5304 Toner Overflow Sensor 9- 18
1660 2470 Capacitor - 47pF ±5% 50V 69 -201 5403 1910 Spring Anchor - Stopper Lever 47 - 31
1660 2471 Capacitor - 470pF - ±5% - 50V 69 -202 5403 2075 Stepped Screw 37 - 5
1660 4103 Capacitor - 10000pF - ±10% - 50V 69 -203 5403 2075 Stepped Screw 31 - 2
1660 4222 Capacitor - 2200pF - ±10% - 50V 69 -204 5413 1882 Stepped Screw 13 - 22
1660 4682 Capacitor - 6800pF 50V 1608 69 -205 5413 3903 Pin - Transfer Guide Plate 9- 2
1660 6103 Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V 69 -206 5415 2904 Stopper Pin 25 - 29
1660 6103 Capacitor - 10000pF - +80%-20%50V 55 -233 5442 2751 Bushing - Upper Registration Roller 19 - 19
1660 8104 Capacitor - 0.1µF +80-20% 25V 69 -207 5446 1134 Bearing Case 25 - 3
1902 0043 IC - 4MX8 70NS G2 55 -234 5446 2824 Screw - Duplex Guide Plate 25 - 13
1904 0031 SRAM - CY7C1021 1M X16 70ns G1 55 -235 5446 2824 Screw - Duplex Guide Plate 19 - 1
1907 0022 SDRAM 64M 1MX16X4 133Mhz G1 69 -208 5446 2824 Screw - Duplex Guide Plate 9- 19
5446 6214 Shaft Holder - Pick-up Roller 25 - 10
5447 2769 Stepped Screw 15 - 5
5840 3022 Stopper Screw - M3 43 - 1
5887 4176 Screw 31 - 23
5918 3120 Stud - M4 39 - 2
94